Cambium Networks 89FT0011 Dual Channel 2.4GHz MIMO Station and Connectorized Station User Manual Exhibit D Users Manual per 2 1033 b3

Cambium Networks Inc. Dual Channel 2.4GHz MIMO Station and Connectorized Station Exhibit D Users Manual per 2 1033 b3

Exhibit D Users Manual per 2 1033 b3

System Release 1.4.3 • Product Description • System Planning • Configuration • Operation and Troubleshooting • Legal and Reference Information User Guide
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Accuracy While reasonable efforts have been made to assure the accuracy of this document, Cambium Networks assumes no liability resulting from any inaccuracies or omissions in this document, or from use of the information obtained herein. Cambium reserves the right to make changes to any products described herein to improve reliability, function, or design, and reserves the right to revise this document and to make changes from time to time in content hereof with no obligation to notify any person of revisions or changes. Cambium does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any product, software, or circuit described herein; neither does it convey license under its patent rights or the rights of others. It is possible that this publication may contain references to, or information about Cambium products (machines and programs), programming, or services that are not announced in your country. Such references or information must not be construed to mean that Cambium intends to announce such Cambium products, programming, or services in your country. Copyrights This document, Cambium products, and 3rd Party software products described in this document may include or describe copyrighted Cambium and other 3rd Party supplied computer programs stored in semiconductor memories or other media. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for Cambium, its licensors, and other 3rd Party supplied software certain exclusive rights for copyrighted material, including the exclusive right to copy, reproduce in any form, distribute and make derivative works of the copyrighted material. Accordingly, any copyrighted material of Cambium, its licensors, or the 3rd Party software supplied material contained in the Cambium products described in this document may not be copied, reproduced, reverse engineered, distributed, merged or modified in any manner without the express written permission of Cambium. Furthermore, the purchase of Cambium products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by implication, estoppel, or otherwise, any license under the copyrights, patents or patent applications of Cambium or other 3rd Party supplied software, except for the normal non-exclusive, royalty free license to use that arises by operation of law in the sale of a product. Restrictions Software and documentation are copyrighted materials. Making unauthorized copies is prohibited by law. No part of the software or documentation may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language, in any form or by any means, without prior written permission of Cambium. License Agreements The software described in this document is the property of Cambium and its licensors. It is furnished by express license agreement only and may be used only in accordance with the terms of such an agreement. High Risk Materials Cambium and its supplier(s) specifically disclaim any express or implied warranty of fitness for any high risk activities or uses of its products including, but not limited to, the operation of nuclear facilities, aircraft navigation or aircraft communication systems, air traffic control, life support, or weapons systems (“High Risk Use”). Any High Risk is unauthorized, is made at your own risk and you shall be responsible for any and all losses, damage or claims arising out of any High Risk Use. © 2014 Cambium Networks Limited. All Rights Reserved. 2
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Safety and regulatory information This section describes important safety and regulatory guidelines that must be observed by personnel installing or operating ePMP equipment. IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION Warning To prevent loss of life or physical injury, observe the safety guidelines in this section. Power lines Exercise extreme care when working near power lines. Working at heights Exercise extreme care when working at heights. Grounding and protective earth Connectorized ePMP devices must be properly grounded to protect against lightning. It is the user’s responsibility to install the equipment in accordance with national regulations. In the USA, follow Section 810 of the National Electric Code, ANSI/NFPA No.70-1984 (USA). In Canada, follow Section 54 of the Canadian Electrical Code. These codes describe correct installation procedures for grounding the outdoor unit, mast, lead-in wire and discharge unit, size of grounding conductors and connection requirements for grounding electrodes. Other regulations may apply in different countries and therefore it is recommended that installation be contracted to a professional installer. Powering down before servicing Always power down and unplug the equipment before servicing. Primary disconnect device The ePMP power supply is the primary disconnect device. External cables Safety may be compromised if outdoor rated cables are not used for connections that will be exposed to the outdoor environment. RF exposure near the antenna Strong radio frequency (RF) fields will be present close to the antenna when the transmitter is on. Always turn off the power to the ePMP device before undertaking maintenance activities in front of the antenna. Minimum separation distances Install the ePMP device so as to provide and maintain the minimum separation distances from all persons. The minimum separation distances for each frequency variant are specified in Calculated distances and power compliance margins on page 263. 3
CAMBIUM NETWORKS IMPORTANT REGULATORY INFORMATION The ePMP product is certified as an unlicensed device in frequency bands where it is not allowed to cause interference to licensed services (called primary users of the bands). Radar avoidance In countries where radar systems are the primary band users, the regulators have mandated special requirements to protect these systems from interference caused by unlicensed devices. Unlicensed devices must detect and avoid co-channel operation with radar systems. The ePMP provides detect and avoid functionality for countries and frequency bands requiring protection for radar systems. Installers and users must meet all local regulatory requirements for radar detection. To meet these requirements, users must set the correct country code during commissioning of the ePMP equipment. If this is not done, installers and users may be liable to civil and criminal penalties. Contact the Cambium helpdesk if more guidance is required. USA and Canada specific information The USA Federal Communications Commission (FCC) has asked manufacturers to implement special features to prevent interference to weather radar systems that operate in the band 5600 MHz to 5650 MHz. These features must be implemented in all products able to operate outdoors in the band 5470 MHz to 5725 MHz. Manufacturers must ensure that such radio products cannot be configured to operate outside of FCC rules; specifically it must not be possible to disable or modify the radar protection functions that have been demonstrated to the FCC. In order to comply with these FCC requirements, Cambium supplies variants of the ePMP for operation in the USA or Canada. These variants are only allowed to operate with license keys and country codes that comply with FCC/IC rules. In particular, operation of radio channels overlapping the band 5600-5650 MHz is not allowed and these channels are permanently barred. In addition, other channels may also need to be barred when operating close to weather radar installations. Note To ensure compliance with FCC rules (KDB 443999: Interim Plans to Approve UNII Devices Operating in the 5470 - 5725 MHz Band with Radar Detection and DFS Capabilities), follow Avoidance of weather radars on page 64. Other variants of the ePMP are available for use in the rest of the world, but these variants are not supplied to the USA or Canada except under strict controls, when they are needed for export and deployment outside the USA or Canada. Specific expertise and training required for professional installers To ensure that the ePMP is installed and configured in compliance with the requirements of Industry Canada and the FCC, installers must have the radio engineering skills and training described in this section. This is particularly important when installing and configuring an ePMP system for operation in the 5.4 GHz UNII band. 4
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Avoidance of weather radars The installer must be familiar with the requirements in FCC KDB 443999. Essentially, the installer must be able to: • Access the FCC data base of weather radar location and channel frequencies. • Use this information to correctly configure the product (using the GUI) to avoid operation on channels that must be avoided according to the guidelines that are contained in the KDB and explained in detail in this user guide. In ETSI regions, the band 5600 MHz to 5650 MHz is reserved for the use of weather radars. External antennas When using a connectorized version of the product (as compared to the version with an integrated antenna), the conducted transmit power must be reduced to ensure the regulatory limit on transmitter EIRP is not exceeded. The installer must have an understanding of how to compute the effective antenna gain from the actual antenna gain and the antenna cable losses. The product GUI automatically applies the correct conducted power limit to ensure that it is not possible for the installation to exceed the EIRP limit, when the appropriate values for antenna gain are entered into the GUI. Ethernet networking skills The installer must have the ability to configure IP addressing on a PC and to set up and control products using a web browser interface. Lightning protection To protect outdoor radio installations from the impact of lightning strikes, the installer must be familiar with the normal procedures for site selection, bonding and grounding. Installation guidelines for the ePMP can be found in section System planning on page 60. Training The installer needs to have basic competence in radio and IP network installation. The specific requirements applicable to the ePMP must be gained by reading this user guide and by performing sample set ups at base workshop before live deployments. 5
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Contents Safety and regulatory information ................................................................................... 3 Important safety information ........................................................................................... 3 Important regulatory information.................................................................................... 4 Contents ..................................................................................................................... 6 About This User Guide ............................................................................................. 11 General information ....................................................................................................... 12 Version information ........................................................................................................12 Contacting Cambium Networks ......................................................................................12 Problems and warranty .................................................................................................. 14 Security advice ............................................................................................................... 15 Warnings, cautions, and notes ....................................................................................... 16 Caring for the environment ............................................................................................ 17 Product description .................................................................................................. 18 Overview of ePMP .......................................................................................................... 19 Purpose ............................................................................................................................19 Key features .....................................................................................................................19 Typical deployment Equipment ......................................................................................20 Wireless operation ......................................................................................................... 21 Time division duplexing ..................................................................................................21 OFDM and channel bandwidth .......................................................................................21 Adaptive modulation .......................................................................................................21 MIMO ...............................................................................................................................21 Radar avoidance ..............................................................................................................22 Encryption ........................................................................................................................22 Country codes ..................................................................................................................22 PMP networks ..................................................................................................................23 Further reading on wireless operation ...........................................................................24 System management ..................................................................................................... 25 Management agent .........................................................................................................25 Web server .......................................................................................................................25 SNMP ...............................................................................................................................27 Network Time Protocol (NTP) .........................................................................................27 Cambium Network Services Server ...............................................................................27 Software upgrade ............................................................................................................27 Further reading on system management.......................................................................28 System hardware ..................................................................................................... 29 Site planning .................................................................................................................. 30 Site installation ................................................................................................................30 Grounding and lightning protection ...............................................................................30 Lightning protection zones .............................................................................................31 Connectorized Module ................................................................................................... 32 Connectorized Module description ................................................................................32 Connectorized part numbers ..........................................................................................33 Connectorized module mounting bracket ......................................................................33 6
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Connectorized Module interfaces ...................................................................................34 Connectorized Module LEDs ...........................................................................................35 Connectorized Module specifications ............................................................................36 Connectorized Module heater .........................................................................................37 Connectorized Module and external antenna location ..................................................37 Connectorized Module wind loading .............................................................................38 Connectorized Module software packages ....................................................................38 Connectorized module antennas and antenna cabling .................................................. 39 Antenna requirements ....................................................................................................39 FCC and IC approved antennas ......................................................................................39 Integrated Module .......................................................................................................... 40 Integrated Module description .......................................................................................40 Integrated Module part numbers ...................................................................................41 Integrated Module mounting bracket .............................................................................41 Integrated Module interfaces ..........................................................................................42 Integrated Module LEDs ..................................................................................................43 Integrated Module specifications ...................................................................................43 Integrated Module heater ...............................................................................................44 Integrated Module wind loading ....................................................................................44 Integrated Module software packages ...........................................................................45 Un-synced Connectorized Radio .................................................................................... 46 Un-synced Connectorized Radio description .................................................................46 Un-synced Connectorized Radio part numbers .............................................................47 Un-synced Connectorized Radio mounting bracket ......................................................47 Un-synced Connectorized Radio Interfaces ...................................................................48 Un-synced Connectorized Radio LEDs ...........................................................................49 Un-synced Connectorized Radio specifications .............................................................50 Un-synced Connectorized Radio heater .........................................................................51 Un-synced Connectorized Radio and external antenna location ..................................51 Un-synced connectorized Radio wind loading ..............................................................52 Un-synced Connectorized Radio software packages.....................................................53 Un-synced connectorized radio antennas and antenna cabling ...................................53 Antenna requirements ....................................................................................................53 FCC and IC approved antennas ......................................................................................53 Power supply description ...............................................................................................54 Power supply part numbers............................................................................................54 Power supply interfaces ..................................................................................................55 Power supply specifications ...........................................................................................56 Power supply location .....................................................................................................56 Ethernet cabling ............................................................................................................. 57 Ethernet standards and cable lengths ............................................................................57 Outdoor Cat5e cable ........................................................................................................57 Surge Suppression unit .................................................................................................. 58 Cambium 600SSH details ...............................................................................................59 System planning ...................................................................................................... 60 Radio spectrum planning ............................................................................................... 61 General wireless specifications ......................................................................................61 Regulatory limits .............................................................................................................62 7
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Conforming to the limits .................................................................................................62 Available spectrum ..........................................................................................................63 Channel bandwidth .........................................................................................................63 Avoidance of weather radars ..........................................................................................64 Link planning .................................................................................................................. 65 Range and obstacles .......................................................................................................65 Path loss ...........................................................................................................................65 Adaptive modulation .......................................................................................................65 Planning for connectorized units .................................................................................... 66 Calculating maximum power level for connectorized units ..........................................66 Data network planning ................................................................................................... 68 Ethernet interfaces ..........................................................................................................68 Management VLAN .........................................................................................................68 Quality of service for bridged Ethernet traffic ...............................................................69 Configuration ........................................................................................................... 70 Preparing for configuration ............................................................................................ 71 Safety precautions ...........................................................................................................71 Regulatory compliance ...................................................................................................71 Connecting to the unit .................................................................................................... 72 Configuring the management PC ...................................................................................72 Connecting to the PC and powering up .........................................................................73 Using the web interface ................................................................................................. 74 Logging into the web interface .......................................................................................75 Layout of the web interface ............................................................................................76 Configuring connectorized radios using the Quick Start menu ..................................... 83 Configuring STA units using the Quick Start menu ....................................................... 86 Using the AP menu options ........................................................................................... 89 AP Configure menu .........................................................................................................90 AP Monitor menu .......................................................................................................... 116 AP Tools menu .............................................................................................................. 129 Using the STA menu options ....................................................................................... 139 STA Configuration menu .............................................................................................. 140 STA Monitor menu ........................................................................................................ 165 STA Tools menu ............................................................................................................ 177 Radius Server ............................................................................................................... 187 Installing Free-radius on Ubuntu 12.04 LTS ................................................................. 187 Configuring Free-radius server ..................................................................................... 187 Configuring radius parameters on AP .......................................................................... 189 Configuring radius parameters on STA ....................................................................... 190 Configuring MIR profiles ............................................................................................... 191 Creating certificate for Radius server and STA device ................................................ 192 Operation and Troubleshooting ............................................................................ 197 General Planning for Troubleshooting ......................................................................... 198 General Fault Isolation Process .................................................................................... 198 Questions to Help Isolate the Problem ......................................................................... 199 Upgrading device software .......................................................................................... 200 Testing hardware ......................................................................................................... 201 Checking the power supply LED ................................................................................... 201 8
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Power LED is off ............................................................................................................ 201 Ethernet LED is off ......................................................................................................... 201 Troubleshooting the radio link ..................................................................................... 204 Module has lost or does not establish radio connectivity........................................... 204 Link is unreliable or does not achieve data rates required ......................................... 205 Module Has Lost or Does Not Gain GPS Synchronization .......................................... 205 Using the device external reset button ........................................................................ 206 Resetting the AP or STA to factory defaults by power cycling .................................... 207 Legal and reference information ........................................................................... 208 Cambium Networks end user license agreement ........................................................ 209 Acceptance of this agreement ...................................................................................... 209 Definitions ...................................................................................................................... 209 Grant of license ............................................................................................................. 209 Conditions of use ........................................................................................................... 209 Title and restrictions ...................................................................................................... 210 Confidentiality ............................................................................................................... 211 Right to use Cambium’s name ..................................................................................... 211 Transfer .......................................................................................................................... 211 Updates .......................................................................................................................... 211 Maintenance .................................................................................................................. 211 Disclaimer ...................................................................................................................... 212 Limitation of liability ..................................................................................................... 212 U.S. government ........................................................................................................... 212 Term of license .............................................................................................................. 213 Governing law ............................................................................................................... 213 Assignment .................................................................................................................... 213 Survival of provisions ................................................................................................... 213 Entire agreement ........................................................................................................... 213 Third party software ...................................................................................................... 213 Preamble ........................................................................................................................ 223 TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION ... 224 END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS ............................................................................. 229 Hardware warranty ....................................................................................................... 258 Limit of liability ............................................................................................................. 259 System threshold, output power and link loss ............................................................. 260 Compliance with safety standards ............................................................................... 261 Electrical safety compliance.......................................................................................... 261 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) compliance ....................................................... 261 Human exposure to radio frequency energy ............................................................... 262 Compliance with radio regulations .............................................................................. 266 Type approvals .............................................................................................................. 266 FCC and ETSI compliance testing ................................................................................. 266 Examples of regulatory limits ....................................................................................... 267 Notifications ................................................................................................................. 279 2.4 GHz, 5.4 GHz regulatory compliance ...................................................................... 279 5.8 GHz regulatory compliance ..................................................................................... 282 Thailand notification ..................................................................................................... 286 Data throughput tables ................................................................................................. 287 9
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Data throughput capacity .............................................................................................. 287 Radio Specifications ..................................................................................................... 288 Connectorized Radio Specifications ............................................................................. 288 Integrated Radio Specifications .................................................................................... 292 Un-synced Connectorized Radio Specifications .......................................................... 296 Glossary ....................................................................................................................... 300 10
CAMBIUM NETWORKS About This User Guide This guide describes the planning, installation, configuration and operation of the Cambium ePMP Series of point-to-multipoint wireless Ethernet systems. It is intended for use by the system designer, system installer and system administrator. For radio network design, see: • Product description • System hardware • System planning • Legal and reference information For system configuration, monitoring and fault-finding, see: • Configuration • Operation and Troubleshooting For radio equipment installation, refer the following guides: • The ePMP Quick Start Guide • The ePMP Installation Guide Note The ePMP Installation Guide is reproduced as an addendum to this user guide. 11
CAMBIUM NETWORKS General information VERSION INFORMATION The following shows the issue status of this document: Issue Date of issue Remarks 001v000 October 2013 System Release 1.0 (Software Release 1.1.6) 002v000 December 2013 System Release 1.0 (Software Release 1.2.3) 003v000 January 2014 System Release 1.0 (Software Release 1.3.4) 004v000 March 2014 System Release 1.0 (Software Release 1.4.1) 005v000 March 2014 System Release 1.0 (Software Release 1.4.3) CONTACTING CAMBIUM NETWORKS Support website: http://www.cambiumnetworks.com/support Main website: http://www.cambiumnetworks.com Sales enquiries: solutions@cambiumnetworks.com Support enquiries: support@cambiumnetworks.com Telephone number list: http://www.cambiumnetworks.com/support/contact-support/ Address: Cambium Networks Limited, 3800 Golf Road, Suite 360 Rolling Meadows, IL 60008 Purpose Cambium Networks enhanced Point-To-Multipoint (ePMP) documents are intended to instruct and assist personnel in the operation, installation and maintenance of the Cambium ePMP equipment and ancillary devices. It is recommended that all personnel engaged in such activities be properly trained. Cambium disclaims all liability whatsoever, implied or expressed, for any risk of damage, loss or reduction in system performance arising directly or indirectly out of the failure of the customer, or anyone acting on the customer's behalf, to abide by the instructions, system parameters, or recommendations made in this document. 12
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Cross references References to external publications are shown in italics. Other cross references, emphasized in green text in electronic versions, are active links to the references. Feedback We appreciate feedback from the users of our documents. This includes feedback on the structure, content, accuracy, or completeness of our documents. For feedback, send mail to support@cambiumnetworks.com. 13
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Problems and warranty Reporting problems If any problems are encountered when installing or operating this equipment, follow this procedure to investigate and report: 1 Search this document and the software release notes of supported releases. 2 Visit the support website: http://www.cambiumnetworks.com/support/epmp 3 Ask for assistance from the Cambium product supplier. 4 Gather information from affected units, such as any available diagnostic downloads. 5 Escalate the problem by emailing or telephoning support: http://www.cambiumnetworks.com/support/contact-support Repair and service If unit failure is suspected, obtain details of the Return Material Authorization (RMA) process from the support website. Warranty Cambium’s standard hardware warranty is for one (1) year from date of shipment from Cambium or a Cambium distributor. Cambium warrants that hardware will conform to the relevant published specifications and will be free from material defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service. Cambium shall within this time, at its own option, either repair or replace the defective product within thirty (30) days of receipt of the defective product. Repaired or replaced product will be subject to the original warranty period but not less than thirty (30) days. To register PMP products or activate warranties, visit the support website. For warranty assistance, contact the reseller or distributor. Caution Do not open the radio housing for repair or diagnostics; there are no serviceable parts within the housing. Portions of Cambium equipment may be damaged from exposure to electrostatic discharge. Use precautions to prevent damage. 14
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Security advice Cambium Networks systems and equipment provide security parameters that can be configured by the operator based on their particular operating environment. Cambium recommends setting and using these parameters following industry recognized security practices. Security aspects to be considered are protecting the confidentiality, integrity, and availability of information and assets. Assets include the ability to communicate, information about the nature of the communications, and information about the parties involved. In certain instances Cambium makes specific recommendations regarding security practices, however the implementation of these recommendations and final responsibility for the security of the system lies with the operator of the system. Cambium Networks ePMP equipment is shipped with default web management interface login credentials. It is highly recommended that these usernames and passwords are modified prior to system deployment. 15
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Warnings, cautions, and notes The following describes how warnings and cautions are used in this document and in all documents of the Cambium Networks document set. Warnings Warnings precede instructions that contain potentially hazardous situations. Warnings are used to alert the reader to possible hazards that could cause loss of life or physical injury. A warning has the following format: Warning Warning text and consequence for not following the instructions in the warning. Cautions Cautions precede instructions and are used when there is a possibility of damage to systems, software, or individual items of equipment within a system. However, this damage presents no danger to personnel. A caution has the following format: Caution Caution text and consequence for not following the instructions in the caution. Notes A note means that there is a possibility of an undesirable situation or provides additional information to help the reader understand a topic or concept. A note has the following format: Note Note text. 16
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Caring for the environment The following information describes national or regional requirements for the disposal of Cambium Networks supplied equipment and for the approved disposal of surplus packaging. In EU countries The following information is provided to enable regulatory compliance with the European Union (EU) directives identified and any amendments made to these directives when using Cambium equipment in EU countries. Disposal of Cambium equipment European Union (EU) Directive 2002/96/EC Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) Do not dispose of Cambium equipment in landfill sites. For disposal instructions, see http://www.cambiumnetworks.com/support Disposal of surplus packaging Do not dispose of surplus packaging in landfill sites. In the EU, it is the individual recipient’s responsibility to ensure that packaging materials are collected and recycled according to the requirements of EU environmental law. In non-EU countries In non-EU countries, dispose of Cambium equipment and all surplus packaging in accordance with national and regional regulations. 17
Product description This chapter provides a high level description of the ePMP product. It describes in general terms the function of the product, the main product variants and typical deployment. It also describes the main hardware components. The following topics are described in this chapter: • Overview of ePMP on page 19 introduces the key features, typical uses, product variants and components of the ePMP. • Wireless operation on page 21 describes how the ePMP wireless link is operated, including modulation modes, power control and security. • System management on page 25 introduces the ePMP management system, including the web interface, installation, configuration, alerts and upgrades. 18
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Overview of ePMP This section introduces the key features, typical uses, product variants and components of the ePMP. PURPOSE Cambium ePMP Series products are designed for Ethernet bridging over point-to-multipoint microwave links in the unlicensed 5 GHz and 2.4 GHz bands. Users must ensure that the ePMP Series complies with local operating regulations. The ePMP Series acts as a transparent bridge between two segments of the operator and customers’ networks. In this sense, it can be treated as a virtual wired connection between the Access Point and the Station. The ePMP Series forwards 802.3 Ethernet packets destined for the other part of the network and filters packets it does not need to forward. KEY FEATURES The ePMP is a high performance wireless bridge for Ethernet traffic with a maximum UDP throughput of 200+ Mbps (40 MHz Channel Bandwidth). It is capable of operating in line-of-sight (LOS) and near-LOS conditions. Its maximum LOS range is 13 mi (20 MHz channel bandwidth), or 9 mi (40 MHz channel bandwidth). Utilizing GPS sync, the ePMP is an ideal fit for networks that require capacity and reliability for superior QoS in remote and underserved areas. This integrated PTP and PMP solution features an efficient GPS synchronized operational mode that permits highly scalable frequency reuse. The ePMP operates in the unlicensed 5 GHz and 2.4 GHz bands and supports a channel bandwidth of up to 40 MHz. It is available with an integrated antenna or in connectorized version for use with an external antenna. The wireless link is primarily TDD based. System Release 1.2.3 added Flexible Frame Ratio option which provides improved latency and throughput under unsynchronized operational mode. From a network point-of-view, the ePMP wireless link is a transparent Layer 2 bridge. It offers limited switching capability in order to support a primary and a secondary (future release) Ethernet port on the Station. ePMP supports quality of service (QoS) classification capability and supports three traffic priorities. Management of the unit is conducted via the same interface as the bridged traffic (in-band Management). System Release 1.3.4 adds support for RADIUS EAP-TTLS authentication and VSA support for MIR. When deployed with a sector antenna, the ePMP 1000 GPS Sync Radio can be configured as a GPS synchronized Access Point serving ePMP Integrated Radios configured as Stations. When deployed with a high gain point to point antenna, the ePMP GPS Sync Radio can be configured to be a GPS Synchronized Backhaul Master, forming a PTP link with another ePMP Radio module. Table 1 gives a summary of the main ePMP characteristics. 19
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Table 1 Main characteristics of the ePMP Series Characteristic Value Topology PMP or PTP Wireless link condition LOS, near LOS Range 20 MHz: Up to 13 mi 40 MHz: Up to 9 mi Scheduler TDD or Flexible Connectivity Ethernet Operating frequencies Unlicensed bands, 5 GHz and 2.4 GHz Channel bandwidth 20 MHz, 40 MHz Data rate 200+ Mbps TYPICAL DEPLOYMENT EQUIPMENT The ePMP is a solution consisting of an integrated or connectorized outdoor units, indoor power supply units/LAN injectors, cabling, and surge suppression equipment. The main hardware components of an ePMP deployment are as follows: • Connectorized Radio with GPS Sync: A connectorized outdoor transceiver unit containing all the radio, networking, and surge suppression electronics. • Connectorized Radio Power Supply: An indoor power supply module providing Power-over-Ethernet (PoE) supply and 1000/100/10 Base-TX to the Access Point. • Connectorized Radio Cabling and lightning protection: Shielded Cat 5e cables, grounding cables, and connectors. • Integrated Radio: An integrated-antenna outdoor transceiver unit containing all the radio, networking, antenna, and surge suppression electronics. • Un-synced Connectorized Radio: A connectorized outdoor transceiver unit containing all the radio, networking, and surge suppression electronics. • Integrated Radio Power Supply: An indoor power supply module providing Power-over-Ethernet (PoE) supply and 100/10 Base-TX to the Subscriber Module. • Integrated Radio Cabling and lightning protection: Cat 5e cables and connectors For more information about these components, including interfaces, specifications and Cambium part numbers, see System hardware on page 29. 20
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Wireless operation This section describes how the ePMP wireless link is operated, including modulation modes, power control and security. TIME DIVISION DUPLEXING TDD cycle ePMP links operate using Time Division Duplexing (TDD). The links employ a TDD cycle in which the APs determines which STAs may transmit and when based on the configured downlink/uplink ratio (duty cycle). Three fixed Downlink/Uplink frame ratios are available – 75/25, 50/50 and 30/70. A flexible frame ratio is available as a fourth option where the AP dynamically determines the downlink and uplink ratio based on data demand in each direction. OFDM AND CHANNEL BANDWIDTH The ePMP series transmits using Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM). This wideband signal consists of many equally spaced sub-carriers. Although each sub carrier is modulated at a low rate using conventional modulation schemes, the resultant data rate from all the sub-carriers is high. The channel bandwidth of the OFDM signal is 20 MHz or 40 MHz, based on operator configuration. Each channel is offset in center frequency from its neighboring channel by 5 MHz. ADAPTIVE MODULATION The ePMP series can transport data over the wireless link using a number of different modulation modes ranging from 64-QAM to QPSK. For a given channel bandwidth and TDD frame structure, each modulation mode transports data at a fixed rate. Also, the receiver requires a given signal to noise ratio in order to successfully demodulate a given modulation mode. Although the more complex modulations such as 64QAM will transport data at a much higher rate than the less complex modulation modes, the receiver requires a much higher signal to noise ratio. The ePMP series provides an adaptive modulation scheme where the receiver constantly monitors the quality of the received signal and notifies the far end of the link of the optimum modulation mode with which to transmit. In this way, optimum capacity is achieved at all times. MIMO Multiple-Input Multiple-Output (MIMO) techniques provide protection against fading and increase the probability that the receiver will decode a usable signal. The ePMP transmits two signals on the same radio frequency, one of which is vertically polarized and the other horizontally polarized. 21
CAMBIUM NETWORKS RADAR AVOIDANCE In regions where protection of radars is part of the local regulations, the ePMP must detect interference from radar-like systems and avoid co-channel operation with these systems. To meet this requirement, the ePMP implements the following features: • The equipment can only transmit on available channels, of which there are none at initial power up. The radar detection algorithm will always scan a usable channel for 60 seconds for radar interference before making the channel an available channel. • This compulsory channel scan will mean that there is at least 60 seconds service outage every time radar is detected and that the installation time is extended by at least 60 seconds even if there is found to be no radar on the channel There is a secondary requirement for bands requiring radar avoidance. Regulators have mandated that products provide a uniform loading of the spectrum across all devices. In general, this prevents operation with fixed frequency allocations. However: • ETSI regulations do allow frequency planning of networks (as that has the same effect of spreading the load across the spectrum). • The FCC does allow channels to be avoided if there is actually interference on them. Note When operating in a region which requires DFS, ensure that the AP is configured with alternate frequencies and that the STA is configured to scan for these frequencies to avoid long outages. ENCRYPTION The ePMP supports optional encryption for data transmitted over the wireless link. The encryption algorithm used is the Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) with 128-bit key size. AES is a symmetric encryption algorithm approved by U.S. Government organizations (and others) to protect sensitive information. COUNTRY CODES Some aspects of wireless operation are controlled, enforced or restricted according to a country code. ePMP country codes represent individual countries (for example Denmark) or regulatory regions (for example FCC or ETSI). Country codes affect the following aspects of wireless operation: • Maximum transmit power • Radar avoidance • Frequency range Caution To avoid possible enforcement action by the country regulator, always operate links in accordance with local regulations 22
CAMBIUM NETWORKS PMP NETWORKS Using frequency planning Frequency planning is the exercise of assigning operating channels to PMP units so as to minimize RF interference between links. Frequency planning must consider interference from any PMP unit to any other PMP unit in the network. Low levels of interference normally allow for stable operation and high link capacity. The frequency planning task is made more straightforward by use of the following techniques: • Using several different channels • Separating units located on the same mast • Configuring a 5 MHz guard band between adjacent sector operating band edges. For help with planning networks, see System planning, or contact your Cambium distributor or re-seller. 23
CAMBIUM NETWORKS FURTHER READING ON WIRELESS OPERATION For information on planning wireless operation, see: • Radio spectrum planning on page 61 describes the regulatory restrictions that affect radio spectrum usage, such as frequency range and radar avoidance. • Link planning on page 65 describes factors to be taken into account when planning links, such as range, path loss and data throughput. • Compliance with safety standards on page 261 lists the safety specifications against which the ePMP has been tested, and describes how to keep RF exposure within safe limits. • Compliance with radio regulations on page 266 describes how the ePMP complies with the radio regulations that are enforced in various countries. • Notifications on page 278 refer to compliance with the radio regulations that are enforced in various regions. • Data throughput tables on page 287 contains tables and graphs to support calculation of the data rate capacity that can be provided by ePMP configurations. For information on configuring and operating the wireless link, see: • Configuration on page 70 describes the configuration parameters of the ePMP devices • Operation and Troubleshooting on page 197 describes post-installation procedures and troubleshooting tips. 24
CAMBIUM NETWORKS System management This section introduces the ePMP management system, including the web interface, installation, configuration, alerts and upgrades, and management software. MANAGEMENT AGENT ePMP equipment is managed through an embedded management agent. Management workstations, network management systems or PCs can be connected to this agent using the module’s Ethernet port or over-the air (STA). The management agent supports the following interfaces: • Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP) • Hypertext Transfer Protocol secure (HTTPs) • Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) • Network Time Protocol (NTP) • System logging (Syslog) • Cambium Network Services Server (CNSS) software • Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) WEB SERVER The ePMP management agent contains a web server. The web server supports access via the HTTP and HTTPs interfaces. Web-based management offers a convenient way to manage the ePMP equipment from a locally connected computer or from a network management workstation connected through a management network, without requiring any special management software. The web-based interfaces are the only interfaces supported for installation of ePMP, and for the majority of ePMP configuration management tasks. 25
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Figure 1 AP web-based management screenshot Web pages The web-based management interfaces provide comprehensive web-based fault, configuration, performance and security management functions organized into the following web-pages and groups: Access Point and Station web-pages: • Dashboard: The Dashboard web-page reports the general device status, session status, remote subscriber status, event log information, and network interface status. • Configure: The Configuration web-page may be utilized for configuring general device parameters, as well as IP, radio, SNMP, Quality of Service (QoS), security, time, VLAN, protocol filtering, and unit settings. • Monitor: The Monitor web-page reports detailed operating statistics for the radio link and network, and reports system log information. • Tools: The Tools web-page offers useful tools for device installation, configuration, and operation including software upgrade, backup/restore, spectrum analyzer, throughput test, ping test, and traceroute. • Quick Start: The Quick Start web-page provides quick access to requisite parameters for radio link establishment and network access. 26
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Identity-based user accounts When identity-based user accounts are configured, a security officer can define from one to four user accounts, each of which may have one of the four possible roles: • ADMINISTRATOR (default username/password “admin”), who has full read and write permission. • INSTALLER (default username/password “installer”), who has permission to read and write parameters applicable to unit installation and monitoring. • HOME (default username/password “home”), who has permission only to access pertinent information for support purposes • READONLY (default username/password “readonly”), who has permission to only view the Monitor page. SNMP The management agent supports fault and performance management by means of an SNMP interface. The management agent is compatible with SNMP v2c using one Management Information Base (MIB) file which is available for download from the Cambium Networks Support website (https://support.cambiumnetworks.com/files/epmp). NETWORK TIME PROTOCOL (NTP) The clock supplies accurate date and time information to the system. It can be set to run with or without a connection to a network time server (NTP). It can be configured to display local time by setting the time zone and daylight saving in the Time web page. If an NTP server connection is available, the clock can be set to synchronize with the server time at regular intervals. ePMP devices may receive NTP data from a CMM3 or CMM4 module or an NTP server configured in the system’s management network. The Time Zone option is configurable on the AP’s Configure, System page, and may be used to offset the received NTP time to match the operator’s local time zone. CAMBIUM NETWORK SERVICES SERVER The Cambium Network Services Server (CNSS) may be used to monitor, configure, and upgrade Cambium network equipment. For Cambium Network Services Server download, see https://support.cambiumnetworks.com/files/cnss. SOFTWARE UPGRADE Software upgrades may be issued via the radio web interface (Tools, Software Upgrade) or via CNSS (Cambium Networks Services Server). For Software upgrades, see https://support.cambiumnetworks.com/files/epmp . 27
CAMBIUM NETWORKS FURTHER READING ON SYSTEM MANAGEMENT For more information on system management, see: • AP System page on page 104 • STA System page on page 148 • Operation and Troubleshooting on page 197 28
CAMBIUM NETWORKS System hardware This chapter describes the site planning and hardware components of an ePMP link. The following topics are described in this chapter: • Site planning on page 30 describes factors to be considered when planning the proposed network. • Connectorized Module on page 32 describes the connectorized module hardware, part numbers, mounting equipment, and specifications. • Integrated Module on page 40 describes the STA hardware, part numbers, mounting equipment, and specifications. • Un-synced Connectorized Radio on page 46 describes the hardware, part numbers, mounting equipment, and specifications. • Power supply on page 54 describes the power supply hardware, part numbers, and specifications. • Connectorized module antennas and antenna cabling on page 39 describes the AP antenna and part numbers. • Ethernet cabling on page 57 describes cable standards and lengths • Surge Suppression unit on page 58 describes surge suppression requirements and recommendations. 29
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Site planning Conduct a site survey to ensure that the proposed AP and STA sites meet the requirements defined in this section. SITE INSTALLATION An ePMP site typically consists of a high supporting structure such as a mast, tower or building for the AP or STA. There is only one Ethernet interface, a copper Cat5e connection from the AP or STA to the AP/STA power supply and network terminating equipment. If a 1000 Base-TX (Gigabit) Ethernet connection is required at the AP, ensure that power supply N000900L001A is utilized. GROUNDING AND LIGHTNING PROTECTION Warning Electro-magnetic discharge (lightning) damage is not covered under warranty. The recommendations in this guide, when followed correctly, give the user the best protection from the harmful effects of EMD. However 100% protection is neither implied nor possible. Structures, equipment and people must be protected against power surges (typically caused by lightning) by conducting the surge current to ground via a separate preferential solid path. The actual degree of protection required depends on local conditions and applicable local regulations. To adequately protect an ePMP installation, both ground bonding and transient voltage surge suppression are required. Full details of lightning protection methods and requirements can be found in the international standards IEC 61024-1 and IEC 61312-1, the U.S. National Electric Code ANSI/NFPA No. 70-1984 or section 54 of the Canadian Electric Code. Note International and national standards take precedence over the requirements in this guide. 30
CAMBIUM NETWORKS LIGHTNING PROTECTION ZONES Use the rolling sphere method (Figure 2) to determine where it is safe to mount equipment. An imaginary sphere, typically 50 meters in radius, is rolled over the structure. Where the sphere rests against the ground and a strike termination device (such as a finial or ground bar), all the space under the sphere is considered to be in the zone of protection (Zone B). Similarly, where the sphere rests on two finials, the space under the sphere is considered to be in the zone of protection. Figure 2 Rolling sphere method to determine the lightning protection zones Assess locations on masts, towers and buildings to determine if the location is in Zone A or Zone B: • Zone A: In this zone a direct lightning strike is possible. Do not mount equipment in this zone. • Zone B: In this zone, direct EMD (lightning) effects are still possible, but mounting in this zone significantly reduces the possibility of a direct strike. Mount equipment in this zone. Warning Never mount equipment in Zone A. Mounting in Zone A may put equipment, structures and life at risk. 31
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Connectorized Module For details of the ePMP connectorized hardware, see: • Connectorized Module description on page 32 • Connectorized part numbers on page 33 • Connectorized Module interfaces on page 34 • Connectorized Module specifications on page 36 • Connectorized Module and external antenna location on page 37 • Connectorized Module wind loading on page 38 • Connectorized Module software packages on page 38 • Connectorized module antennas and antenna cabling on page 39 CONNECTORIZED MODULE DESCRIPTION The connectorized ePMP device is a self-contained transceiver unit that houses both radio and networking electronics. The connectorized unit is designed to work with externally mounted antennas that have high gains. Connectorized units can cope with more difficult radio conditions. The unit is designed with female RP-SMA 50Ω antenna connections located at the top of the unit. An ePMP connectorized unit may function as an Access Point (AP) or a Station (STA) in a Point-To-Multipoint (PMP) or in a Point-To-Point (PTP) network topology. Note To select antennas, RF cables and connectors for connectorized units, see Connectorized module antennas and antenna cabling on page 39. Figure 3 ePMP Series Connectorized Radio with Sync 32
CAMBIUM NETWORKS CONNECTORIZED PART NUMBERS Choose the correct regional variant: one is for use in regions where FCC or IC licensing restrictions apply (FCC/IC), and the other is for use in ETSI countries or non-FCC/IC/ETSI-restricted regions. Each of the parts listed in Table 2 includes the following items: • One connectorized unit • One power supply 1000/100/10 Base-TX LAN injector The GPS-capable parts listed in Table 2 also ship with a GPS antenna. Table 2 Connectorized part numbers Cambium description Cambium part number ePMP GPS, Conn - 5 GHz - no power cord C050900A011A ePMP GPS, Conn - 5 GHz - US power cord - FCC version C058900A112A ePMP Conn - 5 GHz - no power cord C050900A021A ePMP Conn - 5 GHz - US power cord - FCC version C058900A122A ePMP GPS, Conn - 2.4 GHz - US power cord C024900A011A Table 3 AP accessory part numbers Cambium description Cambium part number ePMP Power Supply for GPS Radio - no cord (spare) N000900L001A ePMP Power Supply for non-GPS Radio - no cord (spare) N000900L002A CONNECTORIZED MODULE MOUNTING BRACKET The connectorized unit is designed to be attached to a Cambium ePMP sector antenna (see Table 10). The Cambium ePMP sector antenna contains all of the mounting brackets, antenna cabling, and GPS antenna mounting for device deployment. 33
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Figure 4 Connectorized module sector antenna CONNECTORIZED MODULE INTERFACES The connectorized module interfaces are illustrated in Figure 5 and described in Table 4. Figure 5 Connectorized module interfaces Table 4 Connectorized module interfaces Name Connector Interface Description Antenna port H RP-SMA, female Antenna, H polarization To/from H polarized antenna port Antenna port V Antenna port H ETH GPS 34
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Antenna port V RP-SMA, female Antenna, V polarization To/from V polarized antenna port ETH RJ45 PoE input 802.3af PoE Standard, as well as Proprietary power over Ethernet (PoE) twisted pair (for powering via CMM3/CMM4) 10/100/1000 Base-TX Ethernet Management and data GPS SMA, female Antenna, GPS To/from GPS antenna Reset Button Physical button N/A For resetting the radio and for setting the radio back to its factory default configuration. See Using the device external reset button on page 206. CONNECTORIZED MODULE LEDS LED Function POWER Green: Power is applied to the device Unlit: No power is applied to the device or improper power source GPS SYNC Orange: AP has acquired a 1PPS GPS synchronization pulse either from the internal GPS module and antenna or from a connected CMM Unlit: 1PPS GPS not acquired, or Synchronization Source set to Internal (AP generating sync, not GPS-based) Reserved for future release ETH Once lit, blinking indicates Ethernet activity Red: 10BaseTX link Green: 100BaseTX link Orange: 1000BaseTX link Unlit: No Ethernet link established 35
CAMBIUM NETWORKS CONNECTORIZED MODULE SPECIFICATIONS The ePMP connectorized module conforms to the specifications listed in Table 5 and Table 6. The connectorized meets the low level static discharge specifications identified in Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) compliance on page 261 and provides internal surge suppression but does not provide lightning suppression. For a full listing of connectorized radio specifications, see Connectorized Radio Specifications on page 288. Table 5 Connectorized module physical specifications Category Specification Dimensions (H x W x D) Radio: 227 x 88 x 33 mm (8.9” x 3.5” x 1.3”) Antenna: 529 x 124 x 53 mm (20.8” x 4.9” x 2.1”) Weight .521 kg (1.15 lbs) without antenna 4.5 kg (10 lbs) with antenna Table 6 Connectorized module environmental specifications Category Specification Temperature -30°C (-22°F) to +55°C (131°F) Wind loading 118 mph (190 kph) maximum. See Connectorized Module wind loading on page 38 for a full description. Humidity 95% condensing Environmental IP55 36
CAMBIUM NETWORKS CONNECTORIZED MODULE HEATER Upon power on, if the ePMP connectorized module temperature is at or below 32° F (0° C), an internal heater is activated to ensure that the device is able to successfully begin operation. The unit’s heater is only activated when the unit is powered on, and will not apply heat to the device once startup is complete. When the unit temperature is greater than 32° F (0° C), the heater is deactivated and the unit continues its startup sequence. The effect on device startup time at various temperatures is defined in Table 7. Table 7 Connectorized module startup times based on ambient temperature Initial Temperature Startup time (from power on to operational) -22° F (-30° C) 20 minutes -4° F (-20° C) 6 minutes 14° F (-10° C) 2 minutes, 30 seconds CONNECTORIZED MODULE AND EXTERNAL ANTENNA LOCATION Find a location for the device and external antenna that meets the following requirements: • The equipment is high enough to achieve the best radio path. • People can be kept a safe distance away from the equipment when it is radiating. The safe separation distances are defined in Calculated distances and power compliance margins on page 263. • The equipment is lower than the top of the supporting structure (tower, mast or building) or its lightning air terminal. • The location is not subject to excessive wind loading. For more information, see Connectorized Module wind loading on page 38. 37
CAMBIUM NETWORKS CONNECTORIZED MODULE WIND LOADING Ensure that the device and the structure on which it is mounted are capable of withstanding the prevalent wind speeds at a proposed ePMP site. Wind speed statistics is available from national meteorological offices. The device and its mounting bracket are capable of withstanding wind speeds of up to 190 kph (118 mph). Wind blowing on the device will subject the mounting structure to significant lateral force. The magnitude of the force depends on both wind strength and surface area of the device. Wind loading is estimated using the following formulae: Force (in kilograms) = 0.1045aV2 Where: Is: a surface area in square meters V wind speed in meters per second Force (in pounds) = 0.0042Av2 Where: Is: A surface area in square feet v wind speed in miles per hour Applying these formulae to the ePMP device at different wind speeds, the resulting wind loadings are shown in Table 8 and Table 9. Table 8 Connectorized module wind loading (Kg) Type of ePMP device Largest surface area (square meters) Wind speed (meters per second) 30 40 50 60 70 Connectorized 0.13 12.2 Kg 21.7 Kg 34 Kg 49 Kg 66.6 Kg Table 9 Connectorized module wind loading (lb) Type of ePMP device Largest surface area (square feet) Wind speed (miles per hour) 80 100 120 140 150 Connectorized 1.39 37.4 lb 58.4 lb 84.1 lb 114.4 lb 131.4 lb CONNECTORIZED MODULE SOFTWARE PACKAGES Connectorized radios may be upgraded by downloading new software packages from the Cambium Networks website or by using the Cambium Network Services Server. The software packages applicable to ePMP connectorized radios are named: • ePMP-GPS_Synced-v1.4.3.tar.gz 38
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Connectorized module antennas and antenna cabling Connectorized modules require external antennas connected using RF cable (included with Cambium ePMP sector antennas). For details of the antennas and accessories required for a connectorized ePMP installation, see: • Antenna requirements on page 39 • FCC and IC approved antennas on page 39 ANTENNA REQUIREMENTS For connectorized units operating in the USA or Canada 2.4 GHz, 5.4 GHz or 5.8 GHz bands, choose external antennas from those listed in FCC and IC approved antennas on page 39. For installations in other countries, the listed antennas are advisory, not mandatory. FCC AND IC APPROVED ANTENNAS For connectorized units operating in the USA or Canada, choose external antennas from Table 10. These are approved by the FCC for use with the product and are constrained by the following limits: • 5 GHz – 15 dBi gain • 2.4 GHz - 15 dBi gain Caution Using other than approved antennas may cause measurements higher than reported for certification. Caution This radio transmitter (IC certification number 109W-0005) has been approved by Industry Canada to operate with the antenna types listed below with the maximum permissible gain and required antenna impedance for each antenna type indicated. Antenna types not included in this list, having a gain greater than the maximum gain indicated for that type, are strictly prohibited for use with this device. Le présent émetteur radio (Numéro de certification IC 109W-0005) a été approuvé par Industrie Canada pour fonctionner avec les types d'antenne énumérés ci-dessous et ayant un gain admissible maximal et l'impédance requise pour chaque type d'antenne. Les types d'antenne non inclus dans cette liste, ou dont le gain est supérieur au gain maximal indiqué, sont strictement interdits pour l'exploitation de l'émetteur. Table 10 Allowed antennas for deployment in USA/Canada Cambium part number Antenna Type Gain (dBi) C050900D003A 5 GHz Sector Antenna – 90 degree 15 C050900D002A 5 GHz Sector Antenna – 120 degree 15 C024900D004A 2.4 GHz Sector Antenna - 90 /120 degree 15 39
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Integrated Module For details of the ePMP integrated hardware, see: • Integrated Module description on page 40 • Integrated Module part numbers on page 41 • Integrated Module mounting bracket on page 41 • Integrated Module interfaces on page 42 • Integrated Module specifications on page 43 • Integrated Module heater on page 44 • Integrated Module wind loading on page 44 • Integrated Module software packages on page 45. INTEGRATED MODULE DESCRIPTION The integrated module is a self-contained transceiver unit that houses both radio and networking electronics. An ePMP integrated unit may function as an Access Point (AP) or a Station (STA) in a Point-To-Multipoint (PMP) or in a Point-To-Point (PTP) network topology. Figure 6 ePMP Series Integrated Radio 40
CAMBIUM NETWORKS INTEGRATED MODULE PART NUMBERS Choose the correct regional variant: one is for use in regions where FCC or IC licensing restrictions apply (FCC/IC), and the other is for use in ETSI countries or the rest of the world (ETSI/RoW). Each of the parts listed in Table 11 includes the following items: • One integrated module (with mounting bracket) • One metal mounting strap Table 11 Integrated module part numbers Cambium description Cambium part number ePMP Integrated – 5 GHz – no power cord C050900C031A ePMP Integrated – 5 GHz – US power cord – FCC version C058900C132A ePMP Integrated – 5 GHz – EU power cord C050900P033A ePMP Integrated - 2.4 GHz - US power cord C024900C031A Table 12 Integrated module accessory part numbers Cambium description Cambium part number ePMP Power Supply for non-GPS Radio - no cord (spare) N000900L002A INTEGRATED MODULE MOUNTING BRACKET The integrated module is designed to be pole-mounted for use with a non-Cambium antenna. Order integrated module mounting brackets from Cambium Networks. Figure 7 Integrated module mounting bracket 41
CAMBIUM NETWORKS INTEGRATED MODULE INTERFACES The integrated module interfaces are illustrated in Figure 8 and described in Table 13. Figure 8 Integrated module interfaces Table 13 Integrated module interfaces Port name Connector Interface Description Primary Ethernet RJ45 PoE input Proprietary power over Ethernet (PoE) twisted pair (for powering via CMM3/CMM4) 10/100 Base-TX Ethernet Management and data Auxiliary Ethernet (future release) RJ45 Cambium proprietary PoE output, data bridging Proprietary 30V PoE output for auxiliary devices (not 802.3af standard PoE) Auxiliary Ethernet Primary Ethernet 42
CAMBIUM NETWORKS INTEGRATED MODULE LEDS LED Function POWER Green: Power is applied to the device Unlit: No power is applied to the device or improper power source ETH 1 Main/Primary Ethernet port indicator Once lit, blinking indicates Ethernet activity Green: 10/100BaseTX link ETH 2 Auxiliary/Secondary Ethernet port indicator Once lit, blinking indicates Ethernet activity Green: 10/100BaseTX link Radio scanning: LEDs light in an ascending sequence to indicate that the radio is scanning Radio registered: LEDs light to indicate the RSSI level at the device. RSSI > -60 dBm -70 dBm < RSSI ≤≤ -60 dBm -80 dBm < RSSI ≤ -70 dBm RSSI ≤ -80 dBm INTEGRATED MODULE SPECIFICATIONS The ePMP integrated module conforms to the specifications listed in Table 14 and Table 15. The integrated device meets the low level static discharge specifications identified in Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) compliance on page 261 and provides internal surge suppression but does not provide lightning suppression. For a full listing of integrated radio specifications, see Error! Reference source not found. on page Error! Bookmark not defined.. 43
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Table 14 Integrated module physical specifications Category Specification Dimensions (H x W x D) Radio: 29.1 x 14.5 x 8.3 cm (11.4 x 5.7 x 3.3 in) Weight 0.49 kg (1.1 lbs) Table 15 Integrated module environmental specifications Category Specification Temperature -30°C (-22°F) to +60°C (131°F) Wind loading 90 mph (145 kph) maximum. See Integrated Module wind loading on page 44 for a full description. Humidity 95% condensing Environmental IP55 INTEGRATED MODULE HEATER Upon power on, if the ePMP integrated module device temperature is at or below 32° F (0° C), an internal heater is activated to ensure that the device is able to successfully begin operation. The unit’s heater is only activated when the unit is powered on, and will not apply heat to the device once startup is complete. When the unit temperature is greater than 32° F (0° C), the heater is deactivated and the integrated module continues its startup sequence. The effect on integrated module startup time at various temperatures is defined in Table 16. Table 16 Integrated module startup times based on ambient temperature Initial Temperature Startup time (from power on to operational) -22° F (-30° C) 4 minutes -4° F (-20° C) 2 minutes 14° F (-10° C) 1 minutes, 30 seconds INTEGRATED MODULE WIND LOADING Ensure that the integrated module and the structure on which it is mounted are capable of withstanding the prevalent wind speeds at a proposed ePMP site. Wind speed statistics must be available from national meteorological offices. The integrated module and its mounting bracket are capable of withstanding wind speeds of up to 145 kph (90 mph). 44
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Wind blowing on the integrated module will subject the mounting structure to significant lateral force. The magnitude of the force depends on both wind strength and surface area of the integrated module. Wind loading is estimated using the following formulae: Force (in kilograms) = 0.1045aV2 Where: Is: a surface area in square meters V wind speed in meters per second Force (in pounds) = 0.0042Av2 Where: Is: A surface area in square feet v wind speed in miles per hour Applying these formulae to the ePMP integrated module at different wind speeds, the resulting wind loadings are shown in Table 17 and Table 18. Table 17 Integrated module wind loading (Kg) Type of ePMP module Largest surface area (square meters) Wind speed (meters per second) 30 40 50 60 70 Integrated 0.042 4 Kg 7 Kg 11 Kg 15.8 Kg 21.6 Kg Table 18 Integrated module wind loading (lb) Type of ePMP module Largest surface area (square feet) Wind speed (miles per hour) 80 100 120 140 150 Integrated 0.45 12.1 lb 18.9 lb 27.2 lb 37 lb 42.5 lb INTEGRATED MODULE SOFTWARE PACKAGES Integrated radios may be upgraded by downloading new software packages from the Cambium Networks website or by using the Cambium Network Services Server. The software packages applicable to ePMP integrated radios are named: • ePMP-NonGPS_Synced-v1.4.3.tar.gz 45
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Un-synced Connectorized Radio For details of the ePMP connectorized hardware, see the following: • Un-synced Connectorized Radio description on page 46 • Un-synced Connectorized Radio part numbers on page 47 • Un-synced Connectorized Radio Interfaces on page 48 • Un-synced Connectorized Radio specifications on page 50 • Un-synced Connectorized Radio and external antenna location on page 51 • Un-synced connectorized Radio wind loading on page 52 • Un-synced Connectorized Radio software packages on page 53 • Un-synced connectorized radio antennas and antenna cabling on page 53 UN-SYNCED CONNECTORIZED RADIO DESCRIPTION The connectorized ePMP device is a self-contained transceiver unit that houses both radio and networking electronics. The connectorized unit is designed to work with externally mounted antennas that have high gains. Connectorized units can cope with more difficult radio conditions. The unit is designed with female RP-SMA 50Ω antenna connections located at the top of the unit. An ePMP connectorized unit may function as an Access Point (AP) or a Station (STA) in a Point-To-Multipoint (PMP) or in a Point-To-Point (PTP) network topology. Note To select antennas, RF cables and connectors for connectorized units, see Un-synced connectorized radio antennas and antenna cabling on page 53. Figure 9 ePMP Series Un-synced Connectorized Radio 46
CAMBIUM NETWORKS UN-SYNCED CONNECTORIZED RADIO PART NUMBERS Choose the correct regional variant: one is for use in regions where FCC or IC licensing restrictions apply (FCC/IC), and the other is for use in ETSI countries or non-FCC/IC/ETSI-restricted regions. Each of the parts listed in Table 19 includes the following items: • One connectorized unit • One power supply 100/10 Base-TX LAN injector Table 19 Un-synced Connectorized Radio part numbers Cambium description Cambium part number ePMP 1000: 5 GHz Connectorized Radio (EU) C050900A023A ePMP 1000: 5 GHz Connectorized Radio (FCC) C058900A122A ePMP 1000: 5 GHz Connectorized Radio (ROW) C050900A021A ePMP 1000: 2.4 GHz Connectorized Radio C024900A021A Table 20 AP accessory part numbers Cambium description Cambium part number ePMP Power Supply for non-GPS Radio - no cord (spare) N000900L002A UN-SYNCED CONNECTORIZED RADIO MOUNTING BRACKET The unsynced connectorized unit is designed to be attached to a Cambium ePMP sector antenna or with a non-Cambium antenna. Figure 10 Un-synced connectorized radio sector antenna 47
CAMBIUM NETWORKS UN-SYNCED CONNECTORIZED RADIO INTERFACES The un-synced connectorized radio with interfaces are illustrated in Figure 11 and described in Table 21. Figure 11 Un-synced connectorized radio interfaces Table 21 Un-synced connectorized radio interfaces Name Connector Interface Description Antenna port H RP-SMA, female Antenna, H polarization To/from H polarized antenna port Antenna port V RP-SMA, female Antenna, V polarization To/from V polarized antenna port Primary Ethernet RJ45 PoE input Proprietary power over Ethernet (PoE) twisted pair (for powering via CMM3/CMM4) 10/100 Base-TX Ethernet Management and data Auxiliary Ethernet (future release) RJ45 Cambium propriety PoE output, data bridging Propriety 30V PoE output for auxiliary devices (not 802 3af standard Poe) Reset Button Physical button N/A For resetting the radio and for resetting the radio back to its factory default configuration, see Using the device external reset button on page 206. Antenna port V Antenna port H AUXILLARY ETHERNET PRIMARY ETHERNET 48
CAMBIUM NETWORKS UN-SYNCED CONNECTORIZED RADIO LEDS LED Function POWER Green: Power is applied to the device Unlit: No power is applied to the device or improper power source ETH 1 Main/Primary Ethernet port indicator Once lit, blinking indicates Ethernet activity Green: 10/100BaseTX link ETH 2 Auxiliary/Secondary Ethernet port indicator Once lit, blinking indicates Ethernet activity Green: 10/100BaseTX link Radio scanning: LEDs light in an ascending sequence to indicate that the radio is scanning Radio registered: LEDs light to indicate the RSSI level at the device. Reserved for future release RSSI > -60 dBm -70 dBm < RSSI ≤≤ -60 dBm -80 dBm < RSSI ≤ -70 dBm RSSI ≤ -80 dBm 49
CAMBIUM NETWORKS UN-SYNCED CONNECTORIZED RADIO SPECIFICATIONS The ePMP un-synced connectorized radio conforms to the specifications listed in Table 22 and Table 23. The connectorized meets the low level static discharge specifications identified in Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) compliance on page 261 and provides internal surge suppression but does not provide lightning suppression. For a full listing of connectorized radio specifications, see Connectorized Radio Specifications on page 288. Table 22 Un-synced connectorized radio physical specifications Category Specification Dimensions (H x W x D) Radio: 227 x 88 x 33 mm (8.9” x 3.5” x 1.3”) Antenna: 529 x 124 x 53 mm (20.8” x 4.9” x 2.1”) Weight .521 kg (1.15 lbs) without antenna 4.5 kg (10 lbs) with antenna Table 23 Un-synced connectorized radio environmental specifications Category Specification Temperature -30°C (-22°F) to +55°C (131°F) Wind loading 118 mph (190 kph) maximum. See Un-synced connectorized Radio wind loading on page 52 for a full description. Humidity 95% condensing Environmental IP55 50
CAMBIUM NETWORKS UN-SYNCED CONNECTORIZED RADIO HEATER On startup, if the ePMP un-synced connectorized radio temperature is at or below 32° F (0° C), an internal heater is activated to ensure that the device is able to successfully begin operation. The unit’s heater is only activated when the unit is powered on and will not transfer heat to the device until the startup completes. When the unit temperature is greater than 32° F (0° C), the heater is deactivated and the unit continues its startup sequence. The effect on device startup time at various temperatures is defined in Table 24. Table 24 Un-synced connectorized radio startup times based on ambient temperature Initial Temperature Startup time (from power on to operational) -22° F (-30° C) 20 minutes -4° F (-20° C) 6 minutes 14° F (-10° C) 2 minutes, 30 seconds UN-SYNCED CONNECTORIZED RADIO AND EXTERNAL ANTENNA LOCATION Find a location for the device and external antenna that meets the following requirements: • The equipment is high enough to achieve the best radio path. • People are a safe distance away from the equipment when it is radiating. The safe separation distances are defined in Calculated distances and power compliance margins on page 263. • The equipment is lower than the top of the supporting structure (tower, mast or building) or its lightning air terminal. • The location is not subjected to excessive wind loading. For more information, see Un-synced connectorized Radio wind loading on page 52. 51
CAMBIUM NETWORKS UN-SYNCED CONNECTORIZED RADIO WIND LOADING Ensure that the device and the structure on which it is mounted are capable of withstanding the prevalent wind speeds at a proposed ePMP site. Wind speed statistics must be available from national meteorological offices. The device and its mounting bracket are capable of withstanding wind speeds of up to 190 kph (118 mph). Wind speeds on the device subjects the mounting structure to significant lateral force. The magnitude of the force depends on both the wind strength and surface area of the device. Wind loading is estimated using the following formulae: Force (in kilograms) = 0.1045aV2 Where: Is: a surface area in square meters V wind speed in meters per second Force (in pounds) = 0.0042Av2 Where: Is: A surface area in square feet v wind speed in miles per hour Applying these formulae to the ePMP device at different wind speeds, the resulting wind loadings are shown in Table 25 and Table 26. Table 25 Un-synced connectorized radio wind loading (Kg) Type of ePMP device Largest surface area (square meters) Wind speed (meters per second) 30 40 50 60 70 Connectorized 0.13 12.2 Kg 21.7 Kg 34 Kg 49 Kg 66.6 Kg Table 26 Un-synced connectorized radio wind loading (lb) Type of ePMP device Largest surface area (square feet) Wind speed (miles per hour) 80 100 120 140 150 Connectorized 1.39 37.4 lb 58.4 lb 84.1 lb 114.4 lb 131.4 lb 52
CAMBIUM NETWORKS UN-SYNCED CONNECTORIZED RADIO SOFTWARE PACKAGES Un-synced connectorized radio may be upgraded by downloading new software packages from the Cambium Networks website or by using the Cambium Network Services Server. The software packages applicable to ePMP Un-synced connectorized radio are named: • ePMP-NonGPS_Synced-v1.4.3.tar.gz UN-SYNCED CONNECTORIZED RADIO ANTENNAS AND ANTENNA CABLING Un-synced connectorized radio requires external antennas connected using RF cable (included with Cambium ePMP sector antennas). For details of the antennas and accessories required for a connectorized ePMP installation, see: • Antenna requirements on page 39 • FCC and IC approved antennas on page 39 ANTENNA REQUIREMENTS For connectorized units operating in the USA or Canada 2.4 GHz, 5.4 GHz or 5.8 GHz bands, choose external antennas from those listed in FCC and IC approved antennas on page 39. For installations in other countries, the listed antennas are advisory, not mandatory. FCC AND IC APPROVED ANTENNAS For connectorized units operating in the USA or Canada, choose external antennas from Table 27. These are approved by the FCC for use with the product and are constrained by the following limits: • 5 GHz – 15 dBi gain • 2.4 GHz - 15 dBi gain Caution Using other than approved antennas may cause measurements higher than reported for certification. Caution This radio transmitter (IC certification number 109W-0005) has been approved by Industry Canada to operate with the antenna types listed below with the maximum permissible gain and required antenna impedance for each antenna type indicated. Antenna types not included in this list, having a gain greater than the maximum gain indicated for that type, are strictly prohibited for use with this device. Le présent émetteur radio (Numéro de certification IC 109W-0005 ) a été approuvé par Industrie Canada pour fonctionner avec les types d'antenne énumérés ci-dessous et ayant un gain admissible maximal et l'impédance requise pour chaque type d'antenne. Les types d'antenne non inclus dans cette liste, ou dont le gain est supérieur au gain maximal indiqué, sont strictement interdits pour l'exploitation de l'émetteur. 53
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Table 27 Allowed antennas for deployment in USA/Canada – 5 GHz Cambium part number Antenna Type Gain (dBi) C050900D003A 5 GHz Sector Antenna – 90 degree 15 C050900D002A 5 GHz Sector Antenna – 120 degree 15 Power supply For details of the ePMP power supply units, see: • Power supply description on page 54 • Power supply part numbers on page 54 • Power supply interfaces on page 55 • Power supply specifications on page 56 • Power supply location on page 56 POWER SUPPLY DESCRIPTION The power supply is an indoor unit that is connected to the connectorized or integrated module and network terminating equipment using Cat5e cable with RJ45 connectors. It is also plugged into an AC or DC power supply so that it can inject Power over Ethernet (PoE) into the module. POWER SUPPLY PART NUMBERS Each module requires one power supply and one power supply line cord. One can order power supplies and line cords from Cambium Networks (Table 28). The power supplies listed in Table 28 may be used for both connectorized and integrated modules, however, only N000900L001A provides a Gigabit Ethernet interface (connectorized modules only). Table 28 Power supply component part numbers Cambium description Cambium part number ePMP Pwr Supply for GPS Radio - no cord (spare) N000900L001A ePMP Pwr Supply for non-GPS Radio - no cord (spare) N000900L002A 54
CAMBIUM NETWORKS POWER SUPPLY INTERFACES The power supply interfaces are illustrated in Figure 12 and described in Table 29 and Table 31. Figure 12 Power supply interfaces Table 29 Power supply interface functions - N000900L001A Interface Function Power input Mains power input. Gigabit Data + Power RJ45 socket for connecting Cat5e cable to radio Note This port provides a Gigabit Ethernet interface to ePMP connectorized radios. To ePMP integrated radios, this port provides a 100/10 Mbit/sec Ethernet interface. Gigabit Data RJ45 socket for connecting Cat5e cable to network. Table 30 Power supply interface functions - N000900L002A Interface Function Power input Mains power input. 10/100 Mbit/sec Data + Power RJ45 socket for connecting Cat5e cable to radio 10/100 Mbit/sec Data RJ45 socket for connecting Cat5e cable to network. Table 31 Power Supply LED functions LED Function Power (green) Power supply detection Gigabit Data Gigabit Data + Power Power input 55
CAMBIUM NETWORKS POWER SUPPLY SPECIFICATIONS The ePMP power supply conforms to the specifications listed in Table 32, Table 33 and Table 34. These specifications apply to all ePMP product variants. Table 32 Power supply physical specifications Category Specification Dimensions (H x W x D) 11.8 x 4.4 x 3.2 cm (4.66 x 1.75 x 1.25 in) Weight 0.26 lbs Table 33 Power supply environmental specifications Category Specification Ambient Operating Temperature 0° C to +40° C Humidity 20% - 90% Table 34 Power supply electrical specifications Category Specification AC Input 100 to 240 VAC Efficiency Meets efficiency level ‘V’ Over Current Protection Zener clamping (38V to 45V) Hold up time 10 ms minimum at maximum load, 120 VAC POWER SUPPLY LOCATION Find a location for the power supply that meets the following requirements: • The power supply can be mounted on a wall or other flat surface. • The power supply is kept dry, with no possibility of condensation, flooding or rising damp. • The power supply can be accessed to view status indicators. • The power supply can be connected to the ePMP module drop cable and network terminating equipment. • The power supply can be connected to a mains or dc power supply that meets the requirements defined in Table 34. 56
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Ethernet cabling For details of the Ethernet cabling components of an ePMP installation, see: • Ethernet standards and cable lengths on page 57 • Outdoor Cat5e cable on page 57 ETHERNET STANDARDS AND CABLE LENGTHS All configurations require a copper Ethernet connection from the power supply port to the power supply and network terminating equipment. Table 35 specifies, for each power supply, the maximum permitted drop cable length. Table 35 Power supply drop cable length restrictions Part number Description Maximum cable length (*1) N000900L001A Power Supply for Radio with Gigabit Ethernet (no cord) 330 feet (100m) N000900L002A Power Supply for Radio with 100Mbit Ethernet (no cord) 330 feet (100m) (*1) Maximum length of Ethernet cable from AP/STA to power supply OUTDOOR CAT5E CABLE For copper connections from the device to the power supply, use Cat5e cable that is shielded with copper-plated steel. Caution Always use Cat5e cable that is shielded with copper-plated steel. Alternative types of Ethernet cable are not supported by Cambium Networks. 57
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Surge Suppression unit The ePMP integrated and connectorized units both contain 1 Joule-rated surge suppression build into the device. With this built in surge suppression, it is not required to install a surge suppressor at the unit’s mounting location. However, it is required to install a surge suppressor at the Ethernet cable’s building ingress into the power supply’s indoor location. For installations not requiring Gigabit (1000 Mbit/sec) Ethernet, a Cambium 600SSH surge suppressor may be used. See Cambium 600SSH details for information. 58
CAMBIUM NETWORKS CAMBIUM 600SSH DETAILS Note For connectorized module installations requiring Gigabit (1000 Mbit/sec) Ethernet surge suppression, utilize the following: Mfr Part Description L-COM AL-CAT6JW Outdoor 10/100/1000 Base-T CAT6 PoE Compatible Lightning Protector L-COM AL-CAT6HPJW Outdoor 10/100/1000 Base-T CAT6 PoE Compatible Lightning Protector – High Power (protection comparable to 600SSH) 1 Holes—for mounting the Surge Suppressor to a flat surface (such as an outside wall). The distance between centers is 4.25 inches (108 mm). 2 RJ-45 connectors—One side (neither side is better than the other for this purpose) connects to the product (AP, SM, or cluster management module). The other connects to the AC adaptor’s Ethernet connector. 3 Ground post and washer—use heavy gauge (10 AWG or 6 mm2) copper wire for connection. Refer to local electrical codes for exact specifications. Note The 600SSH surge suppressor is shipped in the “isolated” position (pin 4 isolated by 68V from protective earth). If packet error issues occur over the Ethernet link (verify by pinging the device through the 600SSH), configure the 600SSH to “grounded” position (by moving the 600SSH switch from “isolated” to “ground”) to avoid ground loops that may be present in the system. 4 Ground Cable Opening—route the 10 AWG (6 mm2) ground cable through this opening. 5 CAT-5 Cable Knockouts—route the two CAT-5 cables through these openings, or alternatively through the Conduit Knockouts. 6 Conduit Knockouts—on the back of the case, near the bottom. Available for installations where cable is routed through building conduit. 1 2 3 6 5 4 5 6 2 1 59
System planning This chapter provides information to help the user to plan an ePMP link. The following topics are described in this chapter: • Radio spectrum planning on page 61 describes how to plan ePMP links to conform to the regulatory restrictions that apply in the country of operation. • Link planning on page 65 describes factors to be taken into account when planning links, such as range, path loss and throughput. • Planning for connectorized units on page 66 describes factors to be taken into account when planning to use connectorized APs with external antennas in ePMP links. • Grounding and lightning protection on page 30 describes the grounding and lightning protection requirements of a ePMP installation. • Data network planning on page 68 describes factors to be considered when planning ePMP data networks. 60
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Radio spectrum planning This section describes how to plan ePMP links to conform to the regulatory restrictions that apply in the country of operation. Caution It is the responsibility of the user to ensure that the PMP product is operated in accordance with local regulatory limits. Note Contact the applicable radio regulator to find out whether or not registration of the ePMP link is required. GENERAL WIRELESS SPECIFICATIONS Table 36 lists the wireless specifications that apply to all ePMP variants. Table 37 lists the wireless specifications that are specific to each frequency variant. Table 36 ePMP wireless specifications (all variants) Item Specification Channel selection Manual selection (fixed frequency). Manual power control To avoid interference to other users of the band, maximum power can be set lower than the default power limit (AP only). Integrated device antenna type Patch antenna Duplex scheme Adaptive TDD Range 13 mi (20 MHz channel bandwidth) 9 mi (40 MHz channel bandwidth) Over-the-air encryption AES Error Correction FEC 61
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Table 37 ePMP wireless specifications (per frequency band) Item 5 GHz 2.4 GHz RF band (GHz) 5150 - 5875 MHz 2402 - 2472 MHz (20 MHz) 2407 - 2472 MHz (40 MHz) Channel bandwidth 20 MHz 40 MHz 20 MHz 40 MHz Typical antenna gain Connectorized antenna – 15 dBi Integrated patch antenna – 13 dBi Connectorized antenna - 15 dBi Integrated patch antenna - 11 dBi Antenna beamwidth (integrated) 24° azimuth, 12° elevation 24° azimuth, 12° elevation REGULATORY LIMITS The local regulator may restrict frequency usage and channel width, and may limit the amount of conducted or radiated transmitter power. For details of these restrictions, see Examples of regulatory limits on page 267. Many countries impose EIRP limits (Allowed EIRP) on products operating in the bands used by the ePMP Series. For example, in the 5 GHz and 2.4 GHz bands, these limits are calculated as follows: • In the 5.2 GHz (5250 MHz to 5350 MHz) and 5.4 GHz (5470 MHz to 5725 MHz) band, the EIRP must not exceed the lesser of 30 dBm or (17 + 10 x Log Channel width in MHz) dBm. • In the 5.8 GHz band (5725 MHz to 5875 MHz), the EIRP must not exceed the lesser of 36 dBm or (23 + 10 x Log Channel width in MHz) dBm. • In the 2.4 GHz band (2400 MHz to 2500 MHz), the EIRP must not exceed the lesser of 36 dBm or (23 + 10 x Log Channel width in MHz) dBm. Some countries (for example the USA) impose conducted power limits on products operating in the 5 GHz and 2.4 GHz band. CONFORMING TO THE LIMITS Ensure the link is configured to conform to local regulatory requirements by configuring the correct country code (located in the web management interface, under Configure => Radio). In the following situations, the country code does not automatically prevent operation outside the regulations: • When using connectorized APs with external antennas, the regulations may require the maximum transmit power to be reduced. To ensure that regulatory requirements are met for connectorized installations, see Calculating maximum power level for connectorized units on page 66. When operating in ETSI regions, it is required to enter a license key in the ePMP web management interface to unlock 5.8 GHz band frequencies. This key may be obtained from https://support.cambiumnetworks.com/licensekeys/epmp. 62
CAMBIUM NETWORKS • When installing 5.4 GHz links in the USA, it may be necessary to avoid frequencies used by Terminal Doppler Weather Radar (TDWR) systems. For more information, see Avoidance of weather radars on page 64. AVAILABLE SPECTRUM The available spectrum for operation depends on the region. When configured with the appropriate country code, the unit will only allow operation on those channels which are permitted by the regulations. Note In Italy, there is a regulation which requires a general authorization of any 5.4 GHz radio link which is used outside the operator’s own premises. It is the responsibility of the installer or operator to have the link authorized. For details, see: http://www.sviluppoeconomico.gov.it/index.php?option=com_content&view=article&idmenu=672 &idarea1=593&andor=AND&idarea2=1052&id=68433&sectionid=1,16&viewType=1&showMenu=1&showCat=1&idarea3=0&andorcat=AND&partebassaType=0&idareaCalendario1=0&MvediT=1 &idarea4=0&showArchiveNewsBotton=0&directionidUser=0 For the form that must be used for general authorization, see: http://www.sviluppoeconomico.gov.it/images/stories/mise_extra/Allegato%20n19.doc Certain regulations have allocated certain channels as unavailable for use: • ETSI has allocated part of the 5.4 GHz band to weather radar. • UK and some other European countries have allocated part of the 5.8 GHz band to Road Transport and Traffic Telematics (RTTT) systems. For details of these restrictions, see Examples of regulatory limits on page 267. Where regulatory restrictions apply to certain channels, these channels are barred automatically by the use of the correct country code. For example, at 5.8 GHz in the UK and some other European countries, the RTTT band 5795 MHz to 5815 MHz is barred. With the appropriate country code configured for this region, the ePMP will not operate on channels within this band. The number and identity of channels barred by the license key and country code is dependent on the channel bandwidth. For more information about configuring the Country Code parameter, see on AP Radio page on page 91 and STA Radio page on page 141. CHANNEL BANDWIDTH Select the required channel bandwidth for the link. The selection depends upon the ePMP frequency variant and country code, as specified in Examples of regulatory limits on page 267. The wider the channel bandwidth, the greater its capacity. As narrower channel bandwidths take up lesser spectrum, selecting a narrow channel bandwidth may be a better choice when operating in locations where the spectrum is very busy. Both ends of the link must be configured to operate on the same channel bandwidth. 63
CAMBIUM NETWORKS AVOIDANCE OF WEATHER RADARS To comply with FCC rules (KDB 443999: Interim Plans to Approve UNII Devices Operating in the 5470 - 5725 MHz Band with Radar Detection and DFS Capabilities), units which are installed within 35 km (22 miles) of a Terminal Doppler Weather Radar (TDWR) system (or have a line of sight propagation path to such a system) must be configured to avoid any frequency within +30 MHz or –30 MHz of the frequency of the TDWR device. This requirement applies even if the master is outside the 35 km (22 miles) radius but communicates with outdoor clients which may be within the 35 km (22 miles) radius of the TDWRs. The requirement for ensuring 30 MHz frequency separation is based on the best information available to date. If interference is not eliminated, a distance limitation based on line-of-sight from TDWR will need to be used. In addition, devices with bandwidths greater than 20 MHz may require greater frequency separation. When planning a link in the USA, visit http://spectrumbridge.com/udia/home.aspx, enter the location of the planned link and search for TDWR radars. If a TDWR system is located within 35 km (22 miles) or has line of sight propagation to the PMP device, perform the following tasks: • Register the installation on http://spectrumbridge.com/udia/home.aspx. • Make a list of channel center frequencies that must be barred, that is, those falling within +30 MHz or –30 MHz of the frequency of the TDWR radars. In ETSI regions, the band 5600 MHz to 5650 MHz is reserved for the use of weather radars. 64
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Link planning This section describes factors to be taken into account when planning links, such as range, obstacles path loss and throughput. RANGE AND OBSTACLES Calculate the range of the link and identify any obstacles that may affect radio performance. Perform a survey to identify all the obstructions (such as trees or buildings) in the path and to assess the risk of interference. This information is necessary in order to achieve an accurate link feasibility assessment. PATH LOSS Path loss is the amount of attenuation the radio signal undergoes between the two ends of the link. The path loss is the sum of the attenuation of the path if there were no obstacles in the way (Free Space Path Loss), the attenuation caused by obstacles (Excess Path Loss) and a margin to allow for possible fading of the radio signal (Fade Margin). The following calculation needs to be performed to judge whether a particular link can be installed: capabilityseasonalfadeexcessspacefreeLLLLL <+++_ Where: Is: spacefreeL_ Free Space Path Loss (dB) excessL Excess Path Loss (dB) fadeL Fade Margin Required (dB) seasonalL Seasonal Fading (dB) capabilityL Equipment Capability (dB) Free space path loss is a major determinant in received (Rx) signal level. Rx signal level, in turn, is a major factor in the system operating margin (fade margin), which is calculated as follows: System Operating Margin (fade margin) dB = Rx signal level (dB) – Rx sensitivity (dB) Thus, the fade margin is the difference between strength of the received signal and the strength that the receiver requires for maintaining a reliable link. ADAPTIVE MODULATION Adaptive modulation ensures that the highest throughput that can be achieved instantaneously will be obtained, taking account of propagation and interference. When the link has been installed, web pages provide information about the link loss currently measured by the equipment, both instantaneously and averaged. 65
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Planning for connectorized units This section describes factors to be taken into account when planning to use connectorized APs with external antennas in ePMP networks. CALCULATING MAXIMUM POWER LEVEL FOR CONNECTORIZED UNITS If a connectorized ePMP link is to be installed in a country that imposes an EIRP limit in the selected band, choose an external antenna and RF cable that will not cause the ePMP to exceed the EIRP limit. To calculate the highest setting of Maximum Power Level that will be permitted, use this formula: Maximum Power Level (dBm) = Allowed EIRP (dBm) – Antenna Gain (dBi) + Cable Loss (dB) Where: Is: Maximum Power Level (dBm) the highest permissible setting of the Maximum Power Level attribute in the Step 2: Wireless Configuration page, Allowed EIRP (dBm) the EIRP limit allowed by the regulations, Antenna Gain (dBi) the gain of the chosen antenna, Cable Loss (dB) the loss of the RF cable connecting the AP to the antenna. As the 2.4 GHz, 5.4 GHz and 5.8 GHz have an operating bandwidth of 20 MHz or 40 MHz then the maximum allowed EIRP depends on the operating bandwidth of the radio as shown in Table 38. Table 38 Normal EIRP limits with operating channel bandwidth Operating bandwidth (MHz) Allowed EIRP (dBm) at 5.2 GHz Allowed EIRP (dBm) at 5.4 GHz Allowed EIRP (dBm) at 5.8 GHz Allowed EIRP (dBm) at 2.4 GHz 20, 40 30 30 36 36 The settings to be used for regions with the EIRP limits in Table 38 are shown in Table 39. Table 39 Setting maximum transmit power to meet general EIRP limits Antenna Maximum available antenna gain (dBi) Operating bandwidth (MHz) Transmitter Output Power parameter setting (dBm) 5.2 GHz 5.4 GHz 5.8 GHz 2.4 GHz Connectorized module sector 15 20, 40 15 15 21 21 66
CAMBIUM NETWORKS antenna Note Table 39 is calculated on the basis of 0.5 dB cable loss and the highest gain antennas per size of which Cambium Networks are aware. At these operating frequencies, antenna cable losses even with short cables are unlikely to ever be below 0.5 dB for practical installations and cable diameters. 67
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Data network planning This section describes factors to be considered when planning ePMP data networks. ETHERNET INTERFACES The ePMP Ethernet ports conform to the specifications listed in Table 40. Table 40 ePMP Ethernet bridging specifications Ethernet Bridging Specification Protocol 10BASE-Te/100BASE-Tx/1000BASE-T IEEE 802.3 IEEE 802.3af (PoE) IEEE802.3u compliant Auto-negotiation QoS Proprietary QoS Interface 10/100/1000BaseT (RJ-45) Data Rates See Data throughput tables on page 287. Maximum Ethernet Frame Size 1700 bytes Service classes for bridged traffic 3 classes Note Practical Ethernet rates will depend on network configuration, higher layer protocols and platforms used. Over the air throughput will be capped to the rate of the Ethernet interface at the receiving end of the link. MANAGEMENT VLAN Decide if the IP interface of the AP/STA management agent will be connected in a VLAN. If so, decide if this is a standard (IEEE 802.1Q) VLAN or provider bridged (IEEE 802.1ad) VLAN, and select the VLAN ID for this VLAN. Use of a separate management VLAN is strongly recommended. Use of the management VLAN helps to ensure that the AP/STA management agent cannot be accessed by customers. 68
CAMBIUM NETWORKS QUALITY OF SERVICE FOR BRIDGED ETHERNET TRAFFIC Decide how quality of service will be configured in ePMP to minimize frame loss and latency for high priority traffic. Wireless links often have lower data capacity than wired links or network equipment like switches and routers, and quality of service configuration is most critical at network bottlenecks. ePMP provides three priority types for traffic waiting for transmission over the wireless link – Voice, High, and Low. Low is the lowest priority and Voice is the highest priority. Traffic is scheduled using strict priority; in other words, traffic in a given priority is transmitted when all higher-priority transmissions are complete. 69
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Configuration This chapter describes all configuration and alignment tasks that are performed when an ePMP system is deployed. Configure the units by performing the following tasks: • Preparing for configuration on page 71 • Connecting to the unit on page 72 • Using the web interface on page 74 • Configuring connectorized radios using the Quick Start menu on page 83 • Configuring STA units using the Quick Start menu on page 86 • Using the AP menu options on page 89 • Using the STA menu options on page 139 70
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Preparing for configuration This section describes the checks to be performed before proceeding with unit configuration. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS All national and local safety standards must be followed while configuring the units. Warning Ensure that personnel are not exposed to unsafe levels of RF energy. The units start to radiate as soon as they are powered up. Respect the safety standards defined in Compliance with safety standards on page 261, in particular the minimum separation distances. Observe the following guidelines: • Never work in front of the antenna when the AP is powered. • Always power down the power supply before connecting or disconnecting the Ethernet cable from the module. REGULATORY COMPLIANCE All applicable radio regulations must be followed while configuring the units and aligning the antennas. For more information, see Compliance with radio regulations on page 264. 71
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Connecting to the unit To connect the unit to a management PC, use the following procedures: • Configuring the management PC on page 72 • Connecting to the PC and powering up on page 73 CONFIGURING THE MANAGEMENT PC Use this procedure to configure the local management PC to communicate with the ePMP module. Procedure: 1 Select Properties for the Ethernet port. In Windows 7 this is found in Control Panel > Network and Internet > Network Connections > Local Area Connection. 2 Select the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) item: 3 Click Properties. 4 Enter an IP address that is valid for the 192.168.0.X network, avoiding: 192.168.0.1, 192.168.0.2, and 192.168.03 A good example is 192.168.0.100: 5 Enter a subnet mask of 255.255.255.0. Leave the default gateway blank. 6 Click OK, then click Close 72
CAMBIUM NETWORKS CONNECTING TO THE PC AND POWERING UP Use this procedure to connect a management PC directly to the ePMP for configuration and alignment purposes, and to power up the ePMP device. Procedure: 1 Check that the device and power supply are correctly connected (the device Ethernet port is connected to the power supply Ethernet power port – see the ePMP Installation Guide for more information). 2 Connect the PC Ethernet port to the LAN (AP: “Gigabit Data”, STA: “10/100Mbit Data”) port of the power supply using a standard (not crossed) Ethernet cable. 3 Apply mains or battery power to the power supply. The green Power LED must illuminate continuously. Note If the Power and Ethernet LEDs do not illuminate correctly, see Testing hardware on page 201. 73
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Using the web interface To understand how to use the ePMP web interface, see: • Logging into the web interface on page 75 • Layout of the web interface on page 76 • Configuring connectorized radios using the Quick Start menu on page 83 • Configuring STA units using the Quick Start menu on page 86 • Using the AP menu options on page 89 • Using the STA menu options on page 139 74
CAMBIUM NETWORKS LOGGING INTO THE WEB INTERFACE Use this procedure to log into the web interface as a system administrator. Equipment and tools: • Connectorized or integrated device connected to power supply by Ethernet cable. • PC connected to power supply by Ethernet cable. • Power Supply powered up. • Supported browser – Chrome v29, Firefox v24, Internet Explorer 10, Safari v5 Procedure: 1 Start the web browser from the management PC. 2 Type the IP address of the unit into the address bar. The factory default IP address is either 192.168.0.1 (connectorized radio) or 192.168.0.2 (integrated radio). Press ENTER. The web interface dashboard and login input is displayed. Note If Device IP address Mode is set to DHCP and the device is unable to retrieve IP address information via DHCP, the device management IP is set to fallback IP 192.168.0.1 (AP mode), 192.168.0.2 (STA mode), 192.168.0.3 (Spectrum Analyzer mode) or the previously-configured static Device IP Address. Units may always be accessed via the Ethernet port with IP 10.1.1.254. 3 In the upper-right corner of the GUI, enter Username (default: admin) and Password (default:admin). 4 Click Login. 75
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Note New ePMP devices all contain default username and password configurations. It is recommended to change these password configurations immediately. These passwords may be configured in the management GUI in section Configure, System, User Management LAYOUT OF THE WEB INTERFACE After logging in, the web interface first displays a dashboard view of vital system status and statistics. Also, the first level of navigation is displayed across the top (Configure, Monitor, Tools, and Quick Start). To return to this display at any time, click the Home icon or device name (i.e. “ePMP Access Point”) Figure 13 GUI dashboard 76
CAMBIUM NETWORKS The top of the interface contains the following attributes: Table 41 GUI status bar attributes Icon Attribute Meaning Cambium Networks logo Hyperlink to the Cambium Networks website. Home Icon Link to the device dashboard. Login Level indicator Displays the current user login level. Internet Connectivity Indicator Green indicates that the AP has IP connectivity to the configured DNS server. Grey indicates that the AP has no IP connectivity to the configured DNS server. Note The Internet Connectivity Indicator state is determined by receipt of ping responses from the configured DNS server. GPS Synchronization Receive Indicator Green indicates that the AP is receiving a valid GPS synchronization timing pulse via a connected GPS antenna or a CMM. Red indicates that the AP is not receiving GPS synchronization due to lack of satellite fix. Grey indicates that the AP is not receiving GPS synchronization due to configuration of Synchronization Source to Internal. Notifications Button The Notifications button may be clicked to display system messaging. When a new notification is available, the icon is highlighted and displays the number of notifications available. The outer icon highlighting indicates the type of notification pending: Green: Successful operation has completed (i.e. Changes successfully saved) Grey: Informational message (i.e. tips regarding GUI operation) Blue: Operations information message (i.e. Initializing upgrade…) Orange: Warning message (i.e. Login session has expired) Red: Error message (i.e. Software update file download failed) 77
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Icon Attribute Meaning Undo Button The Undo button may be used to undo changes prior to a Save operation. All changes made on any section of the GUI are undone. Save Button The Save button is used to commit configuration changes to the device. When configuration changes are made, the outer area of the icon is highlighted blue to indicate that a save operation is required. Reset Button The Reset button is used to reset the device. When a configuration change requires a radio reset, the outer area of this icon is highlighted orange to indicate that a reset is necessary to complete the change. Logout Button The Logout button is used to logout from the current session and return to the initial GUI landing page (login screen). The bottom of the interface contains the following attributes: Table 42 GUI footer attributes Attribute Meaning Cambium Support link Hyperlink to the Cambium Networks support website. Software Version link The current software version is reported in the footer bar, and may be clicked to navigate to the Cambium Networks software support website. Copyright Copyright information. The AP dashboard contains the following attributes: Table 43 AP dashboard attributes Attribute Meaning Date and Time The current date and time on the device, subject to the configuration of parameter Time Zone System Uptime The total uptime of the radio since the last reset. System Name The current configured system name. System Description The current configured system description. Wireless MAC Address The MAC address of the device wireless interface. LAN MAC Address The MAC address of the device LAN (Ethernet) interface. 78
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Attribute Meaning Operating Frequency The current frequency carrier used for radio transmission, based on the configuration of the Frequency Carrier parameter (in DFS regions, if a radar has been detected, this field may display either DFS Alternate Frequency Carrier 1 or DFS Alternate Frequency Carrier 2). Operating Channel Bandwidth The current channel bandwidth used for radio transmission, based on the configuration of the Channel Bandwidth parameter. Transmitter Output Power The current operating transmit power of the AP. Registered STA Count The total number of STAs currently registered to the STA. Ethernet Interface (LAN) Up: The Ethernet (LAN) interface is functioning properly Down: The Ethernet (LAN) interface has encountered an error and is not servicing traffic. Wireless Interface (LAN) Up: The radio (WAN) interface is functioning properly Down: The radio (WAN) interface has encountered an error and is not servicing traffic. Current Country Code The current configured country code, which has an effect on DFS operation and transmit power restrictions. Registered Stations will inherit this country code when registration is complete (unless STA is locked to US region). Antenna Gain The configured gain of the external antenna. DL/UL Ratio The current configured schedule of downlink traffic to uplink traffic on the radio link. In other words, this ratio represents the amount of the total radio link’s aggregate throughput that will be used for downlink resources, and the amount of the total radio link’s aggregate throughput that will be used for uplink resources. AP Name (SSID) The current configured name/SSID of the AP. Device Coordinates The current configured Latitude and Longitude coordinates in decimal format. IP Address The current configured device IP address (LAN) used for management access. Authentication Type The current configured authentication type used for radio link encryption as well as STA authentication. DFS Status Current DFS operational status. 79
CAMBIUM NETWORKS The STA dashboard consists of the following attributes: Table 44 STA dashboard attributes Attribute Meaning Date and Time The current date and time on the device, subject to the configuration of parameter Time Zone. If an NTP server is not specified, the date and time will begin from factory default upon radio startup. System Uptime The total uptime of the radio since the last reset. System Name The current configured system name. System Description The current configured system description Wireless MAC Address The MAC address of the device Wireless interface. LAN MAC Address The MAC address of the device LAN (Ethernet) interface. Operating Frequency The current operating frequency. Operating Channel Bandwidth The current operating width of the channel used for the radio link. DL RSSI The Received Signal Strength Indicator, which is a measurement of the power level being received by the STA’s antenna. 80
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Attribute Meaning DL SNR The Signal to Noise Ratio, which is an expression of the carrier signal quality with respect to signal noise and co-channel interference (or both). Transmitter Output Power The current power level at which the STA is transmitting (which is adjusted dynamically by the AP based on radio conditions). Uplink MCS Mode Modulation and Coding Scheme – indicates the modulation mode used for the radio uplink, based on radio conditions (MCS 1-7, 9-15). Downlink MCS Mode Modulation and Coding Scheme – indicates the modulation mode used for the radio downlink, based on radio conditions (MCS 1-7, 9-15). Connected AP The AP Name or SSID of the AP to which the STA is registered Connected AP MAC Address The Wireless MAC Address of the AP to which the STA is registered. Ethernet Interface (LAN) Up: The Ethernet (LAN) interface is functioning properly. Down: The Ethernet (LAN) interface has encountered an error and is not servicing traffic. Wireless Interface (WAN) Up: The radio (WAN) interface is functioning properly. Down: The radio (WAN) interface has encountered an error and is not servicing traffic. Current Country Code The current configured country code, which has an effect on DFS operation and transmit power restrictions. Registered Stations will inherit this country code when registration is complete (unless STA is locked to US region). Antenna Gain The configured gain of the external antenna. STA Priority The configured priority of the STA in the sector. Device Name The configured device name of the STA, used for identifying the device in an NMS such as the Cambium Network Services Server (CNSS). Device Coordinates The current configured Latitude and Longitude coordinates in decimal format. IP Address The current configured device IP address (LAN, Ethernet interface) used for management access. WAN IP Address The current configured device IP address (Wireless interface). STA Network Mode Bridge: The STA will act as a switch, and packets are forwarded or filtered based on their MAC destination address. NAT: The STA will act as a router, and packets are forwarded or filtered based on their IP header (source or destination) which can be grouped into subnets for finer granularity. DFS Status Current DFS operational status. 81
CAMBIUM NETWORKS The GUI interface consists of two levels of navigation – the first-level navigation buttons on the top (Configure, Monitor, Tools, and Quick Start) as well as the context-based second-level navigations on the left-hand side of the interface. After a second-level navigation section has been chosen, the resulting configuration parameters are displayed in the main GUI pane. Each subsection of parameters may be configured to display a clean view of only basic parameters, or the display may also be configured to display a comprehensive listing of advanced parameters. Figure 14 GUI first-level and second-level navigation 82
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Configuring connectorized radios using the Quick Start menu The Quick Start tab contains a listing of parameters required to configure a simple radio link and to configure requisite networking parameters. After configuring an AP and STA and resetting both devices, the STA will be ready to associate (register) to the AP. Figure 15 AP Quick Start menu To configure an AP via the Quick Start menu, follow this: Procedure: 1 Start the web browser from the management PC. 2 Navigate to menu Quick Start 3 Configure parameter Device Mode: This parameter controls the function of the device – all ePMP devices may be configured to operate as an Access Point (AP), Station (STA), or as a Spectrum Analyzer. For initial link bring-up, choose AP 83
CAMBIUM NETWORKS 4 Configure parameter Country Code: Country Code settings affect the radios in the following ways: • Maximum transmit power limiting (based on radio transmitter power plus configured antenna gain) • DFS operation is enabled based on the configured country code, if applicable • Frequency selection limiting (based on valid frequencies for the configured Country Code) Select the country in which your network will be operating. 5 Configure parameter Frequency Carrier: Configure the frequency carrier for RF transmission. This list is dynamically adjusted to the regional restrictions based on the setting of the Country Code parameter. Ensure that a thorough spectrum analysis has been completed prior to configuring this parameter. 6 Configure parameter AP Name (SSID): The AP Name (SSID) is used to identify the AP, and is used to configure the STA with the appropriate AP with which to register. Ensure that this parameter is configured uniquely for each AP in the network. 7 Configure parameter DL/UL Ratio: Specify the percentage of the aggregate throughput for the downlink (frames transmitted from the AP to the STA). For example, if the aggregate (uplink and downlink total) throughput on the AP is 90 Mb, then 75/25 specified for this parameter allocates 67.5 Mb for the downlink and 22.5 Mb for the uplink. The default for this parameter is 75/25. Caution You must set this parameter exactly the same for all APs in a cluster. 8 Configure parameter Synchronization Source: This parameter defines the timing source for the device which can be GPS-based or internally generated. Select GPS if the AP will receive synchronization pulses from a connected GPS antenna. Select CMM if the device will receive GPS synchronization pulses from a co-located Cambium Cluster Management Module (see PMP Synchronization Solutions User Guide). Select Internal if no GPS synchronization source is available (in this mode, transmission between co-located devices will create radio interference). If Flexible is chosen as the DL/UL Ratio, then this parameter will be greyed out. 9 Configure parameter Device IP address Mode: If DHCP is selected, the DHCP server automatically assigns the IP configuration (Ethernet (LAN) IP Address, Ethernet (LAN) IP Subnet Mask, Gateway IP Address (LAN)) and the values of those individual parameters (below) are not used. To configure a simple test network, select mode Static. 10 Configure parameter Device IP address: Internet Protocol (IP) address. This address is used by the family of Internet protocols to uniquely identify this unit on a network. To configure a simple test network, this field may be left at default (192.168.0.1). 84
CAMBIUM NETWORKS 11 Configure parameter Device IP Subnet Mask: The Subnet Mask defines the address range of the connected IP network. To configure a simple test network, this field may be left at default (255.255.255.0). 12 Configure parameter Device Gateway IP Address: The IP address of a computer on the current network that acts as a gateway. A gateway acts as an entrance and exit to packets from and to other networks. To configure a simple test network, this parameter may be left at default (blank). 13 Configure parameter Authentication Type Open: All STAs requesting network entry are allowed registration. WPA2: The WPA2 mechanism provides AES radio link encryption and STA network entry authentication. When enabled, the STA must register using the Authentication Pre-shared Key configured on the AP and STA. 14 Configure parameter Authentication Pre-shared Key Configure this key on the AP, then configure each of the network STAs with this key to complete the authentication configuration. This key must be between 8 to 128 symbols. Click the visibility icon to toggle the display of the key’s contents. 15 Click the Save icon, then click the Reset icon 85
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Configuring STA units using the Quick Start menu The Quick Start tab contains a simple listing of parameters required to configure a simple radio link and to configure requisite networking parameters. Figure 16 STA Quick Start menu 86
CAMBIUM NETWORKS To configure an STA via the Quick Start menu, follow this: Procedure: 1 Start the web browser from the management PC. 2 Navigate to menu Quick Start 3 Configure parameter Device Mode: This parameter controls the function of the device – all ePMP devices may be configured to operate as an Access Point (AP), Station (STA), or as a Spectrum Analyzer. For initial link bring-up, choose STA 4 The Country Code is automatically retrieved from the AP, and does not require configuration. Country Code settings affect the radios in the following ways: • Maximum transmit power limiting (based on radio transmitter power plus configured antenna gain) • DFS operation is enabled based on the configured country code, if applicable • Frequency range of operation depending on local limitations 5 Configure parameter Device Name: The STA Device Name is used to identify the device on the network. This parameter may be modified or left at the default value of Cambium-STA. 6 Configure parameter Device IP Address Mode: If DHCP is selected, the DHCP server automatically assigns the IP configuration (Ethernet (LAN) IP Address, Ethernet (LAN) IP Subnet Mask, Gateway IP Address (LAN)) and the values of those individual parameters (below) are not used. To configure a simple test network, this parameter must be configured to Static. 7 Configure parameter Device IP Address: Internet Protocol (IP) address. This address is used by the family of Internet protocols to uniquely identify this unit on a network. To configure a simple test network, this field must be configured to 192.168.0.2. 8 Configure parameter Device IP Subnet Mask: The Subnet Mask defines the address range of the connected IP network. To configure a simple test network, this field may be left at default (255.255.255.0). 9 Configure parameter Device Gateway IP Address: The IP address of a computer on the current network that acts as a gateway. A gateway acts as an entrance and exit to packets from and to other networks. To configure a simple test network, this parameter may be left at default (blank). 10 Configure parameter WPA2 Pre-shared Key: Configure each of the network STAs with this key (matching the AP’s configured key) to complete the authentication configuration. This key must be between 8 to 128 symbols. Click the visibility icon to toggle the display of the key’s contents. 87
CAMBIUM NETWORKS 11 Configure parameter EAP-TTLS Username: Configure each of the network STAs with this EAP-TTLS Username (matching the credentials on the Radius server being used for the network). 12 Configure parameter EAP-TTLS Password: Configure each of the network STAs with this EAP-TTLS Password (matching the credentials on the Radius server being used for the network). Click the visibility icon to toggle the display of the password’s contents. 13 Configure parameter Authentication Identity String: Configure each of the network STAs with this Identity string (matching the credentials on the Radius server being used for the network). Default value for this parameter is “anonymous”. 14 Configure parameter Authentication Identity Realm: Configure each of the network STAs with this Identity realm (matching the credentials on the Radius server being used for the network). Default value for this parameter is “cambiumnetworks.com”. 15 Configure the Preferred AP List The Preferred AP List is comprised of a list of up to 16 APs to which the STA sequentially attempts registration. For each AP configured, if authentication is required, enter a Pre-shared Key associated with the configured AP SSID. If this list is empty, or if none of the configured APs are found, the STA will scan and register to the first AP found (with matching radio and/or authentication settings). 16 Configure parameter Radio Frequency 20 MHz and 40MHz Scan List: The Radio Scan List determines the frequencies for which the STA will scan for AP signaling. For a simple radio network setup, click Select All to scan all frequencies. 17 Click the Save icon, then click the Reset icon 88
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Using the AP menu options Use the menu navigation bar in the top and left panels to navigate to each web page. Table 45 lists the functional areas that may be accessed from each menu option. Some of the parameters are only displayed for specific system configurations. Table 45 Functional areas accessed from each menu option Menu option Menu Details Configure AP Configure menu on page 90 Radio AP Radio page on page 91 Quality of Service AP Quality of Service page on page 100 System AP System page on page 104 Network AP Network page on page 108 Security AP Security page on page 111 Monitor AP Monitor menu on page 116 Performance AP Performance page on page 117 System Status AP System Status page on page 120 Wireless Status AP Wireless Status page on page 122 GPS Status AP GPS Status page on page 124 Network Status AP Network Status page on page 126 System Log AP System Log page on page 128 Tools AP Tools menu on page 129 Software Upgrade AP Software Upgrade page on page 130 Factory Default AP Factory Default page on page 132 Spectrum Analyzer AP Spectrum Analyzer page on page 133 Throughput Test AP Throughput Test page on page 136 Ping AP Ping page on page 137 Traceroute AP Traceroute page on page 138 Quick Start Configuring connectorized radios using the Quick Start menu on page 83 89
CAMBIUM NETWORKS AP CONFIGURE MENU Use the Configure menu to access all applicable device configuration parameters. The configuration menu contains the following pages: • AP Radio page on page 91 • AP Quality of Service page on page 100 • AP System page on page 104 • AP Network page on page 108 • AP Security page on page 111 90
CAMBIUM NETWORKS AP Radio page Use the Radio page to configure the device radio interface parameters. Caution Modifying radio parameters may result in a wireless outage. Plan configuration modifications accordingly. Figure 17 AP Radio page 91
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Table 46 AP Radio Configuration attributes Attribute Meaning Country Code From the drop-down list, select the country in which the radio is operating. Country Code settings affect the radios in the following ways: • Maximum transmit power limiting (based on radio transmitter power plus configured antenna gain) • DFS operation is enabled based on the configured country code, if applicable • Frequency selection limiting, based on regional limitations STA Registration Limit Based on sector/network planning and STA service level implementations, set the STA Registration Limit to the maximum allowed number of STAs that are allowed network entry. Default 60. Max Range Enter a number of miles or kilometers for the furthest distance from which an STA is allowed to register to this AP. Do not set the distance to any greater number of miles. A greater distance • does not increase the power of transmission from the AP. • can reduce aggregate throughput. Regardless of this distance, the STA must meet the minimum requirements for an acceptable link. The AP will reject any STA network entry attempts from outside the configured maximum range. Default 3 miles. Caution If the AP is in cluster or is in range of another AP, then you must set this parameter on all other APs in the cluster and in range exactly the same. Otherwise, overlapping RF transmissions will introduce system interference. Cell Range Unit Miles: The Max Range setting and resulting frame calculations are configured in units of miles Kilometers: The Kilometers setting and resulting frame calculations are configured in units of kilometers Channel Bandwidth Configure the channel size used by the radio for RF transmission. This value must match between the AP and STAs. Frequency Carrier Configure the frequency carrier for RF transmission. This list is dynamically adjusted to the regional restrictions based on the setting of the Country Code parameter. 92
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Frequency Reuse Mode The Frequency Reuse Mode parameter allows operators to define which APs are co-located (or within radio range) with other APs. This definition results in an automatic radio network modification such that self-interference is reduced amongst the co-located sectors. Figure 18 depicts a network in which two frequencies “F`1” and “F2” are reused throughout the deployment. Figure 18 Frequency reuse deployment F1F1F2F2F1F1F2F2F1F1F2F2F1F1F2F2F1F1F2F2 The set of APs to configure the Frequency Reuse Mode option on is dependent on the GPS synchronization sources in the whole network, CMM3, CMM4 or “onboard GPS” (GUI options are: GPS or CMM). The GPS sync source is the same on all APs or is a combination of “onboard GPS” and CMM4 In this configuration the GPS synchronization source in the whole network is one of the following: 1- “onboard GPS” or 2- CMM4 or 3- CMM3 or 4- Mix of “onboard GPS” and CMM4 (but NOT CMM3) Figure 19 demonstrates how to configure Frequency Reuse Mode to ensure that interference is reduced throughout the deployment: 93
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Figure 19 Frequency reuse configuration example F1F1F2F2F1F1F2F2F1F1F2F2FR: FrontFR: FrontFR: FrontFR: BackFR: FrontFR: FrontFR: BackFR: FrontFR: Back FR: BackFR: BackFR: BackF1F1F2F2FR: BackFR: FrontFR: BackFR: FrontF1F1F2F2FR: FrontFR: FrontFR: BackFR: Back The rules in selecting the APs to enabling the Frequency Reuse Mode in this deployment are: 1- Only ONE of the APs on the same tower configured with the same frequency must be configured with the Frequency Reuse Mode parameter set to Frequency-Reuse-Back; the other AP shall be configured with Frequency Reuse Mode set to Frequency-Reuse-Front. 2- Only ONE of the APs on different towers facing each other with overlapped coverage must be configured with Frequency Reuse Mode set to Frequency-Reuse-Back. The GPS sync source is a mixture of all types (CMM3, CMM4 & “onboard GPS”) In this configuration the GPS sync source in the whole network is one of the following: 1- (CMM3 and “onboard GPS”) or 2- (CMM3 and CMM4) or 3- (CMM3 and CMM4 and “onboard GPS”) Figure 20 and Figure 21 show examples of which APs to enable the Frequency Reuse Mode feature in this mixture of sync sources. 94
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Figure 20 Example 1 - Frequency reuse configuration, mixture of GPS synchronization sources F1F1F2F2F1F1F2F2F1F1F2F2FR: FrontFR: FrontFR: BackFR: FrontFR: FrontFR: BackFR: FrontFR: FrontFR: Back FR: BackFR: BackFR: BackSYNC Source = GPS/CMM4 SYNC Source = CMM3 SYNC Source = GPS/CMM4F1F1F2F2SYNC Source = CMM3 FR: BackFR: FrontFR: BackFR: FrontF1F1F2F2SYNC Source = GPS/CMM4FR: Front FR: BackFR: Front FR: back Figure 21 Example 2 - Frequency Reuse Configuration with Mixture of GPS sources F1F1F2F2F1F1F2F2F1F1F2F2FR: FrontFR: FrontFR: FrontFR: BackFR: FrontFR: BackFR: FrontFR: FrontFR: Back FR: BackFR: BackFR: BackSYNC Source = GPS/CMM4 SYNC Source = CMM3 SYNC Source = CMM3F1F1F2F2SYNC Source = GPS/CMM4FR: FrontFR: BackFR: BackFR: FrontF1F1F2F2SYNC Source = GPS/CMM4FR: Front FR: BackFR: Front FR: Back 95
CAMBIUM NETWORKS The rules in selecting the APs to configure Frequency Reuse Mode to Frequency Reuse Mode to Frequency-Reuse-Front or Frequency-Reuse-Back in a mixture of sync sources deployments are: 1- Only ONE of the APs on the same tower configured with the same frequency must have Frequency Reuse Mode set to Frequency-Reuse-Back if the sync source of both APs is the same or the sync is a combination of “onboard GPS” and CMM4; the other AP shall have the Frequency-Reuse-Front ON. 2- For the APs on different towers facing each other with overlapped coverage: a. If both APs have the same sync source then only ONE of them must have the Frequency-Reuse-Back ON; the other AP shall have the Frequency-Reuse–Front ON. b. If one AP has “onboard GPS” as sync source and the other one has CMM4 then only ONE of them must have Frequency-Reuse - Back ON; the other AP shall have Frequency-Reuse-Front ON. c. If one AP has “onboard GPS” or CMM4 as sync source and the other one has CMM3 then: i. If the AP with CMM3 sync source has Frequency-Reuse-Back ON, then the other AP (with “onboard GPS” or CMM4 sync source) must have the Frequency-Reuse-Back ON. ii. If the AP with CMM3 sync source has Frequency Reuse Mode set to Off, then the other AP (with “onboard GPS” or CMM4 sync source) must have Frequency Reuse Mode set to Off. DFS Alternate Frequency Carrier 1 Channel Bandwidth Configure the first channel bandwidth configuration that will be used for RF transmission if DFS detection causes the radio to switch from using the channel bandwidth configured in Channel Bandwidth. DFS Alternate Frequency Carrier 1 Configure the first frequency that will be used for RF transmission if DFS detection causes the radio to switch from using the frequency configured in Frequency Carrier. It is important to set this frequency also in the STA Scan List. DFS Alternate Frequency Carrier 2 Configure the second channel bandwidth configuration that will be used for RF transmission if a DFS detection causes the radio to switch from 96
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Channel Bandwidth using the channel bandwidth configured in Channel Bandwidth. DFS Alternate Frequency Carrier 2 Configure the second frequency that will be used for RF transmission if a DFS detection causes the radio to switch from using the frequencies configured in Frequency Carrier and DFS Alternate Frequency Carrier 2 . It is important to set this frequency also in the STA Scan List. PTP Access Off: The system is configured to operate in PMP mode (i.e. more than one STA may connect to the AP) Connect 1st STA: The system is configured to accept only the 1st registered STA. Network entry will be denied for all subsequent STA network entry requests. MAC Limited: The system is configured to accept only one STA registration, and this registration is limited by STA MAC Address (the STA Wireless MAC Address). PTP MAC Address Configure the Wireless MAC Address of the sole STA which will be granted registration to the AP. All other network entry attempts will be rejected by the AP. The STA’s Preferred AP List may be configured with the destination point-to-point AP to ensure that the STA connects with the intended AP. Transmitter Output Power This value represents the combined power of the AP’s two transmitters. This value may be automatically adjusted based on the configuration of the parameter Country Code. Nations and regions may regulate transmitter output power. For example • 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz modules are available as connectorized radios, which require the operator to adjust power to ensure regulatory compliance. The professional installer of the equipment has the responsibility to • maintain awareness of applicable regulations. • calculate the permissible transmitter output power for the module. • confirm that the initial power setting is compliant with national or regional regulations • confirm that the power setting is compliant following any reset of the module to factory defaults. Antenna Gain This value represents the amount of gain introduced by an external antenna (minus cable loss). This value is used in calculating the unit’s Equivalent Isotropic Radiated Power (EIRP) level. For certain Country Code configurations, the unit’s EIRP may be limited based on regional regulations. AP Management Packet Rate MCS0: The system is configured to use MCS0 rate for all management messages. This allows for improved link stability and range in high interference environment. 97
CAMBIUM NETWORKS MCS1: The system is configured to use MCS1 rate for all management messages. This allows for slightly higher sector throughput. This is the default setting. DL/UL Ratio Configure the schedule of downlink traffic to uplink traffic on the radio link. The first three options, 75/25, 50/50 and 30/70, allow the radio to operate in a fixed ratio on every frame. In other words, this ratio represents the amount of the total radio link’s aggregate throughput that will be used for downlink resources, and the amount of the total radio link’s aggregate throughput that will be used for uplink resources. The fourth option, Flexible, allows the radio to dynamically choose the amount of the total radio’s aggregate throughput that will be used for downlink and uplink resources, every frame. Caution Setting this parameter to Flexible causes the radio to operate in unsychronized mode. For all other settings, if the AP is in cluster or is in range of another AP, then you must set this parameter on all other APs in the cluster and in range exactly the same. Otherwise, overlapping RF transmissions will introduce system interference. Beacon Interval 500 msec: Radio beacons will be sent by the AP every 500 milliseconds. Effectively, this configuration allows quicker STA network entry since more beacons are available when the STA is scanning. In large network deployments, a 500 millisecond beacon interval configuration will allow STAs to enter the network more quickly. 1000 msec: (Default) Radio beacons will be sent by the AP every 1000 milliseconds. In small network deployments, this setting may be applicable as beacons are scheduled half as often as a 500 millisecond configuration. This reduction in beacon scheduling results in a minor increase in user data traffic rates (by ~1 packet per second). STA Target Received Power Level Each STA’s transmitter output power is automatically set by the AP. The AP monitors the received power from each STA, and adjusts each STA’s transmitter output power so that the received power at the AP from the STA is not greater what is configured in STA Target Received Power Level. These automatic power adjustments ensure that the STA is not transmitting excessive energy (raising system noise level) and that the STA is able to achieve an optimal modulation state (and maximum achievable throughput). Target receive levels must be set to lesser than -60 dBm nominally in order to prevent interference from co-located co-channel sectors. High Interference Channel Estimation When this feature is enabled, the receiver uses alternate channel estimation method to improve receiver sensitivity especially at lower MCSs in high interference environment. Synchronization GPS: Synchronization timing is received via the AP’s connected GPS 98
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Source antenna. Co-located or in-range APs receiving synchronization via GPS or CMM will transmit and receive at the same time, thereby reducing self-interference. CMM: Synchronization timing is received via the AP’s Ethernet port via a connected Cambium Cluster Management Module (CMM). Co-located or in-range APs receiving synchronization via GPS or CMM will transmit and receive at the same time, thereby reducing self-interference. For more information on CMM configuration, see the PMP Synchronization Solutions User Guide. Caution Verify that the cables from the CMM to the network switch are at most 30 ft (shielded) or 10 ft (unshielded) and that the network switch is not PoE (802.3af). Internal: Synchronization timing is generated by the AP, and timing is not based on GPS pulses. Caution APs using Synchronization Source of Internal will not transmit and receive in sync with other co-located or in-range APs, which introduces interference into the system. Synchronization Holdoff Time (sec) The Synchronization Holdoff Time is designed to gracefully handle fluctuations/losses in the GPS synchronization signaling. After the AP has received a reliable synchronization pulse for at least 60 seconds, if there is a loss of synchronization signal, the Synchronization Holdoff timer is started. During the holdoff interval, all STA registrations are maintained. If a valid GPS synchronization pulse is regained during the holdoff interval, then the AP continues to operate normally. If a valid synchronization pulse is not regained from the GPS source during the holdoff interval, then the AP ceases radio transmission. Default 30 seconds. 99
CAMBIUM NETWORKS AP Quality of Service page The ePMP platform supports three QoS priority levels using air fairness, priority-based starvation avoidance scheduling algorithm: Priority Level ePMP Traffic Priority Label Highest Priority (Served first) VOIP (only utilized when VOIP Enable is set to Enabled) Medium Priority (Served once highest priority traffic is sent) High Lowest Priority (Serviced once Highest and Medium priority traffic is sent) Low By default, all traffic passed over the air interface is low priority. The AP’s Quality of Service page may be utilized to map traffic to certain priority levels using QoS classification rules. The rules included in the table are enforced starting with the first row of the table. Caution Each additional traffic classification rule increases device CPU utilization. Careful network traffic planning is required to efficiently use the device processor. The ePMP platform also supports radio data rate limiting (Maximum Information Rate, or MIR) based on the configuration of the MIR table. Operators may add up to 16 MIR profiles on the AP, each with unique limits for uplink and downlink data rates. The STA field MIR Profile Setting is used to configure the appropriate MIR profile for limiting the STA’s data rate. Priority 100
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Figure 22 AP Quality of Service page Table 47 AP Radio Configuration attributes Attribute Meaning Maximum Information Rate (MIR) Limiting Disabled: When disabled, RF transmission is only limited by the capacity of the link (and any active QoS classification rules). Enabled: When enabled, all downlink and uplink traffic is limited based on the profiles configured in the MIR table. MIR The MIR (Maximum Information Rate) table is comprised of up to sixteen profiles which, after configured, may be set on the STA to employ a certain service level or data rate. Profile Number Assign a profile number to each row in the AP MIR table. This profile number is then set on each STA to limit data transfer rates based on the operator’s configuration of the MIR table and its profiles. Profile Description Assign a logical description for each service level. For example, a tiered service-level provider may deploy service levels “Gold”, “Silver” and “Bronze” or “20 Mbps”, “10 Mbps”, and “5 Mbps” to offer a clear description. Downlink MIR (kbps) Specify the downlink rate at which the AP is allowed to transmit for this configured profile. 101
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Attribute Meaning Uplink MIR (kbps) Specify the uplink rate at which the AP is allowed to transmit for this configured profile. QoS Enable Enabled: The QoS Classification Rules table is editable and is utilized by the device to classify traffic. Disabled: The QoS Classification Rules table is greyed-out and all traffic is sent at one priority level. Broadcast Priority Low Priority: All Broadcast traffic sent over the downlink is prioritized as low priority, and will be delivered to the STA after scheduled high priority and VoIP traffic. High Priority: All Broadcast traffic sent over the downlink is prioritized as high priority, and will be scheduled for delivery to STAs before low priority traffic but after VoIP traffic. Multicast Priority Low Priority: All Multicast traffic sent over the downlink is prioritized as low priority, and will be delivered to the STA after scheduled high priority and VoIP traffic. High Priority: All Multicast traffic sent over the downlink is prioritized as high priority, and will be scheduled for delivery to STAs before low priority traffic but after VoIP traffic. VOIP Enable Enabled: When enabled, two entries are automatically added to the first and second rows of the QoS Classification Rules table, one with Rule Type CoS (5) and one with Rule Type DSCP (46). The addition of these rules ensures that VoIP traffic passed over the radio downlink is given highest priority. The CoS and DSCP values may be modified to accommodate non-standard VoIP equipment. Disabled: When disabled, VoIP traffic is scheduled normally along with all other user data. QoS Classification Rules The QoS Classification Rules table contains all of the rules enforced by the device when passing traffic over the radio downlink. Traffic passed through the device is matched against each rule in the table; when a match is made the traffic is sent over the radio link using the priority defined in column Traffic Priority. 102
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Attribute Meaning Rule Type CoS: Class of Service; traffic prioritization is based on the 3-bit header present in the 802.1Q VLAN-tagged Ethernet frame header in the packet ingressing the AP’s Ethernet port. VLAN ID: traffic prioritization is based on the VLAN ID of the packet ingressing the AP’s Ethernet port. EtherType: traffic prioritization is based on the two octet Ethertype field in the Ethernet frame ingressing the AP’s Ethernet port. The Ethertype is used to identify the protocol of the data in the payload of the Ethernet frame. IP: traffic prioritization is based on the source and (or) destination IP address of the packet ingressing the AP’s Ethernet port. A subnet mask may be included to define a range of IP addresses to match. MAC: traffic prioritization is based on the source and (or) destination MAC address of the packet ingressing the AP’s Ethernet port. A mask may be included to define a range of MAC addresses to match. The mask is made up of a hex representation of a series of 1s to start the mask and 0s that end the mask. A 1 may not follow a 0. Thus, FF:FF:FF:FF:00:00 is allowed, but FF:00:FF:FF:FF:FF is not. The MAC address is combined with the mask to define the range of allowed MAC addresses. Rule Details The Rule Details column is used to configure each classification rule specified in column Rule Type. Traffic Priority High: Traffic ingressing the AP’s Ethernet port is prioritized as “high priority” for sending over the radio link (traffic will be sent after VOIP-classified traffic, but before Low-classified traffic). Low: Traffic ingressing the AP’s Ethernet port is prioritized as “low priority” for sending over the radio link (traffic will be sent after VOIP-classified and High-classified traffic is sent). Voice: VoIP Traffic ingressing the AP’s Ethernet port is given highest priority for sending over the radio link. 103
CAMBIUM NETWORKS AP System page The AP’s System page is used to configure system parameters, services, time settings, SNMP, and syslog. Figure 23 AP System page 104
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Table 48 AP System attributes Attribute Meaning Device Mode All ePMP devices (integrated or connectorized) may be configured to operate in one of three modes: AP: The device will operate as an AP. STA: The device will operate as an STA. Spectrum Analyzer: The devices will operate in Spectrum Analyzer mode, allowing the operator to download the spectrum analyzer tool. AP Name (SSID) The AP Name (SSID) is used to identify the AP to STAs. This value is configured in the STA to select an AP with which to register. Ensure that this parameter is configured uniquely for each AP in the network. WEB Page Auto Update Configure the interval for which the device retrieves system statistics for display on the management interface. For example, if this setting is configured to 5 seconds, the statistics and status parameters displayed on the management interface will be refreshed every 5 seconds (default). Web Service HTTP: Access to the device management GUI is conducted via HTTP. HTTPS: Access to the device management GUI is conducted via HTTPS. HTTP Port If Web Service is set to HTTP, configure the port which the device uses to service incoming HTTP requests for management GUI access. HTTPS Port If Web Service is set to HTTPS, configure the port which the device uses to service incoming HTTPS requests for management GUI access. NTP Server IP Address Mode Static: The device retrieves NTP time data from the servers configured in fields NTP Server IP Address. DHCP: The device retrieves NTP time data from the server IP issued via a network DHCP server. NTP Server 1,2 IP Address Configure primary and secondary NTP server IP addresses from which the device will retrieve time and date information. Time Zone The Time Zone option may be used to offset the received NTP time to match the operator’s local time zone. Populate from Internal GPS On a GPS Synchronized ePMP radio, the Device coordinates can be populated using the information retrieved from the on-board GPS chip. Device Latitude (degrees) Configure Latitude information for the device in decimal format. Internal GPS Latitude On a GPS Synchronized ePMP radio, the field is automatically populated with the Device Latitude information from the on-board GPS chip. Device Longitude (degrees) Configure Longitude information for the device in decimal format. 105
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Attribute Meaning Internal GPS Longitude On a GPS Synchronized ePMP radio, the field is automatically populated with the Device Longitude information from the on-board GPS chip. Device Height (meters) Configure height above sea level for the device in meters. Internal GPS Height On a GPS Synchronized ePMP radio, the field is automatically populated with the Device height above sea level from the on-board GPS chip. Administrator, Installer, Home User, Readonly Username Read-only listing of available login levels. • ADMINISTRATOR, full read write permissions. • INSTALLER, permissions to read and write parameters applicable to unit installation and monitoring. • HOME, permissions only to access pertinent information for support purposes. • READONLY, only has permissions to view the Monitor page. Installer, Home User, Readonly Enable Disabled: The disabled user will not be granted access to the device management interface. The administrator user level cannot be disabled. Enabled: The user is granted access to the device management interface. Administrator, Installer, Home User, Readonly Password Configure a custom password configuration for each user to secure the device. The password character display may be toggled using the visibility icon . Read-only Community String Specify a control string that can allow a Network Management Station (NMS) such as the Cambium Networks Services Server (CNSS) to read SNMP information. No spaces are allowed in this string. This password will never authenticate an SNMP user or an NMS to read/write access. The SNMP Read-only Community String value is clear text and is readable by a packet monitor. Read-write Community String Specify a control string that can allow a Network Management Station (NMS) to access SNMP information. No spaces are allowed in this string. Send SNMP Traps Disabled: SNMP traps for system events will not be sent from the device. Enabled: SNMP traps for system events will be sent to the servers configured in table SNMP Trap Servers. Trap Community String Configure an SNMP Trap Community String which is processed by the servers configured in SNMP Trap Servers. This string is used by the trap server to decide whether or not to process the traps incoming from the device (i.e. for traps to successfully be received by the trap server, the community string must match). 106
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Attribute Meaning SNMP Trap Servers The SNMP Trap Servers table is used to configure trap destinations for SNMP traps generated by the device. Trap Server Destination IP Address Configure the IP address of each SNMP trap server target. Trap Server Destination Port Configure the port to which SNMP traps are sent from the ePMP device. System Name Specify a string to associate with the physical module. This parameter can be polled by the Cambium Networks Services Server (CNSS) or an NMS. System Description Specify a description string to associate with the physical module. This parameter can be polled by the Cambium Networks Services Server (CNSS) or an NMS. Syslog Server IP 1-4 Specify up to four syslog servers to which the device will send syslog messages. System Log Mask Configure the levels of syslog messages which the devices send to the servers configured in parameters Syslog Server IP 1-4. Caution Choose only the syslog levels appropriate for your deployment. Excessive logging can cause the device log file to fill and begin overwriting previous entries. 107
CAMBIUM NETWORKS AP Network page The AP’s Network page is used to configure system networking parameters and VLAN parameters. Figure 24 AP Network page Table 49 AP Network attributes Attribute Meaning Device IP address Mode Static: Device management IP addressing is configured manually in fields Device IP Address (LAN), IP Subnet Mask (LAN), Gateway IP Address (LAN), and DNS Server IP Address (LAN). DHCP: Device management IP addressing (IP address, subnet mask, gateway, and DNS server) is assigned via a network DHCP server, and parameters Device IP Address (LAN), IP Subnet Mask (LAN), Gateway IP Address (LAN), and DNS Server IP Address (LAN) are unused. 108
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Device IP address Internet protocol (IP) address. This address is used by the family of Internet protocols to uniquely identify this unit on a network. Note If Device IP address Mode is set to DHCP and the device is unable to retrieve IP address information via DHCP, the device management IP is set to fallback IP 192.168.0.1 (AP mode), 192.168.0.2 (STA mode), 192.168.0.3 (Spectrum Analyzer mode) or the previously-configured static Device IP Address. Units may always be accessed via the Ethernet port with IP 10.1.1.254. Device IP Subnet Mask Defines the address range of the connected IP network. For example, if Device IP Address (LAN) is configured to 192.168.2.1 and IP Subnet Mask (LAN) is configured to 255.255.255.0, the device will belong to subnet 192.168.2.X. Device Gateway IP Address Configure the IP address of a computer on the current network that acts as a gateway. A gateway acts as an entrance and exit to packets from and to other networks. Primary DNS Server IP Address Configure the primary IP address of the server used for DNS resolution. Secondary DNS Server IP Address Configure the secondary IP address of the server used for DNS resolution. MTU Maximum Transmission Unit; the size in bytes of the largest data unit that the device is configured to process. Larger MTU configurations can enable the network to operate with greater efficiency, but in the case of retransmissions due to packet errors, efficiency is reduced since large packets must be resent in the event of an error. Packets received by the device larger than the configured MTU will be dropped. STP Disabled: When disabled, Spanning Tree Protocol (802.1d) functionality is disabled at the AP. Enabled: When enabled, Spanning Tree Protocol (802.1d) functionality is enabled at the AP, allowing for the prevention of Ethernet bridge loops. 109
CAMBIUM NETWORKS AP Management Access Interface LAN Only: Only allow access to the AP’s web management interface via a local Ethernet (LAN) connection. In this configuration, the AP’s web management interface may not be accessed from over the air (i.e. from a device situated below the STA). LAN and WLAN: Allow access to the AP’s web management interface via a local Ethernet (LAN) connection and from over the air (i.e. from a device situated below the STA). Caution APs configured with AP Management Access Interface set to LAN and WLAN are susceptible to unauthorized access. MGMT VLAN Enabled: The AP management interface can be assigned to a Management VLAN to separate management traffic (remote module management via SNMP or HTTP) from user traffic (such as internet browsing, voice, or video. Once the management interface is enabled for a VLAN, an AP’s management interface can be accessed only by packets tagged with a VLAN ID matching the management VLAN ID. A VLAN configuration establishes a logical group within the network. Each computer in the VLAN, regardless of initial or eventual physical location, has access to the same data based on the VLAN architecture. For the network operator, this provides flexibility in network segmentation, simpler management, and enhanced security. Disabled: When disabled, all IP management traffic is allowed to the device. MGMT VLAN ID Configure this parameter to include the device’s management traffic on a separate VLAN network. For example, if MGMT VLAN ID is set to 2, GUI access will only be allowed from IP packets tagged with VLAN ID 2. MGMT VLAN Priority ePMP radios can prioritize VLAN traffic based on the eight priorities described in the IEEE 802.1p specification. MGMT VLAN Priority represents the VLAN Priority or Class of Service (CoS). Operators may use this prioritization field to give precedence to device management traffic. If the MGMT VLAN Priority field is configured, to access the AP GUI the accessing switch or end device must be configured to tag Ethernet frames with the MGMT VLAN ID value and the same priority values as configured in field MGMT VLAN Priority. For example, if MGMT VLAN ID is set to 100 and MGMT VLAN Priority is set to 5, the Ethernet frames sent to the AP to access the GUI must be tagged with a VLAN ID value of 100 and Class of Service priority set to 5. If MGMT VLAN Priority is not configured (blank), to access the AP GUI the accessing switch or end device only needs to tag Ethernet frames with the same VLAN ID as is configured in the MGMT VLAN ID field. 110
CAMBIUM NETWORKS AP Security page The AP’s Security page is used to configure system security features including STA authentication and Layer2/Layer3 Firewall rules. Caution If a device firewall rule is added with Action set to Deny and Interface set to LAN or WAN and no other rule attribute are configured, the device will drop all Ethernet or wireless traffic, respectively. Ensure that all firewall rules are specific to the type of traffic which must be denied, and that no rules exist in the devices with only Action set to Deny and Interface set to LAN or WAN. To regain access to the device, perform a factory default. Figure 25 AP Security page 111
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Table 50 AP Security attributes Attribute Meaning Authentication Type Open: All STAs requesting network entry are allowed registration. WPA2: The WPA2 mechanism provides AES radio link encryption and STA network entry authentication. When enabled, the STA must register using the Authentication Pre-shared Key configured on the AP and STA. WPA2 Pre-shared Key Configure this key on the AP, then configure each of the network STAs with this key to complete the authentication configuration. This key must be between 8 to 128 symbols. Radius Servers Up to 3 Radius servers can be configured on the device with the following attributes: IP Address: IP Address of the Radius server on the network. Port: The Radius server port. Default is 1812. Secret: The secret key that will be used to communicate with the Radius server. Server Retry Number of times the radio will retry authentication with the configured Radius server before it fails authentication of the STA. Server Timeout Timeout between each retry with the configured Radius server before it fails authentication of the STA. Layer 2 Firewall Entry Enable/Disable Enabled: Modifications to the Layer 2 Firewall Table are allowed and rules are enforced. Disabled: Modifications to the Layer 2 Firewall Table are not allowed and rules are not enforced. Layer 2 Firewall Table When the STA is configured with STA Network Mode set to Bridge, the Layer 2 firewall table may be used to configure rules matching layer 2 (MAC layer) traffic which result in forwarding or dropping the traffic over the radio link or Ethernet interface. Rule Details, Name Assign a logical name to the firewall rule based on the intended rule operation (i.e. “Deny all WLAN traffic from VLAN ID 100”). Rule Details, Action Accept: Layer 2 traffic matching the rule details is forwarded. Deny: Layer 2 traffic matching the rule details is dropped at the device. 112
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Rule Details, Interface WLAN: When this option is selected, firewall rules will be applied to traffic incoming on the device radio interface (WLAN). Depending on the setting of the Action parameter, traffic matching the rule details will either be forwarded to the LAN (Ethernet) interface or dropped at the device. LAN: When this option is selected, firewall rules will be applied to traffic incoming on the device Ethernet interface (LAN). Depending on the setting of the Action parameter, traffic matching the rule details will be either forwarded to the WAN (radio) interface or dropped at the device. Rule Details, Log On: When a firewall rule is matched, a resulting system log message will be generated. Off: When a firewall rule is matched, no system log messaging will be generated. Rule Details, EtherType Rule matching is based on the two octet Ethertype field in the Ethernet frame. The Ethertype is used to identify the protocol of the data in the payload of the Ethernet frame. Rule Details, VLAN ID Rule matching is based on the VLAN ID of the packet. Rule Details, Src MAC Firewall rule matching is based on the source MAC address of the packet. Rule Details, Src Mask A mask may be included to define a range of MAC addresses to match. The mask is made up of a hex representation of a series of 1s to start the mask and 0s that end the mask. A 1 may not follow a 0. Thus, FF:FF:FF:FF:00:00 is allowed, but FF:00:FF:FF:FF:FF is not. The MAC address is combined with the mask to define the range of allowed MAC addresses. Rule Details, Dest MAC Firewall rule matching is based on the destination MAC address of the packet. Rule Details, Dest Mask A mask may be included to define a range of MAC addresses to match. The mask is made up of a hex representation of a series of 1s to start the mask and 0s that end the mask. A 1 may not follow a 0. Thus, FF:FF:FF:FF:00:00 is allowed, but FF:00:FF:FF:FF:FF is not. The MAC address is combined with the mask to define the range of allowed MAC addresses. Layer 3Firewall Entry Enable/Disable Enabled: Modifications to the Layer 3 Firewall Table are allowed and rules are enforced. Disabled: Modifications to the Layer 3 Firewall Table are not allowed and rules are not enforced. 113
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Layer 3 Firewall Table When the STA is configured with STA Network Mode set to NAT, the Layer 3 firewall table may be used to configure rules matching layer 3 (IP layer) traffic which result in forwarding or dropping the traffic over the radio link or Ethernet interface. Rule Details, Name Assign a logical name to the firewall rule based on the intended rule operation (i.e. “Deny all WLAN traffic from Src IP 192.168.2.111”). Rule Details, Action Accept: Layer 3 traffic matching the rule details will be forwarded Deny: Layer 3 traffic matching the rule details will be dropped at the device. Rule Details, Interface WLAN: When this option is selected, firewall rules will be applied to traffic incoming on the device radio interface (WLAN). Depending on the setting of the Action parameter, traffic matching the rule details will either be forwarded to the LAN (Ethernet) interface or dropped at the device. LAN: When this option is selected, firewall rules will be applied to traffic incoming on the device Ethernet interface (LAN). Depending on the setting of the Action parameter, traffic matching the rule details will be either forwarded to the WAN (radio) interface or dropped at the device. Rule Details, Log On: When a firewall rule is matched, a resulting system log message will be generated. Off: When a firewall rule is matched, no system log messaging will be generated. Rule Details, Protocol TCP: Only TCP packets are matched by the configured rule. UDP: Only UDP packets are matched by the configured rule. TCP+UDP: Both TCP and UDP packets are matched by the configured rule. ICMP: Only ICMP packets are matched by the configured rule. IP: Only IP packets are matched by the configured rule. Rule Details, Port Rule matching is based on the port value in the incoming packet. Rule Details, Src IP Rule matching is based on the Source IP address of the incoming packet. Rule Details, Src Mask A subnet mask may be included to define a range of IP addresses to match. For example, if Src IP is configured to 192.168.2.0 and Src Mask is configured to 255.255.255.0, the rule will match all IP addresses from subnetwork 192.168.2.X. Rule Details, Dest IP Rule matching is based on the Destination IP address of the incoming packet. 114
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Rule Details, Dest Mask A subnet mask may be included to define a range of IP addresses to match. For example, if Dest IP is configured to 192.168.2.0 and Dest Mask is configured to 255.255.255.0, the rule will match all IP addresses from subnetwork 192.168.2.X. Rule Details, DSCP Rule matching is based on the DiffServ CodePoint value of the incoming packet. Rule Details, TOS Rule matching is based on the Type Of Service value of the incoming packet. 115
CAMBIUM NETWORKS AP MONITOR MENU Use the Monitor menu to access device and network statistics and status information. This section may be used to analyze and troubleshoot network performance and operation. The Monitor menu contains the following pages: • AP Performance page on page 117 • AP System Status page on page 120 • AP Wireless Status page on page 122 • AP GPS Status page on page 124 • AP Network Status page on page 126 • AP System Log page on page 128 116
CAMBIUM NETWORKS AP Performance page Use the Performance page to monitor system status and statistics to analyze and troubleshoot network performance and operation. Figure 26 AP Performance page 117
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Figure 27 AP Performance page – contd. Table 51 AP Performance page attributes Attribute Meaning Stats Reset Trigger Reset all statistics Ethernet TX, Total TX Total count of bytes transferred from the AP’s Ethernet interface Ethernet TX, Total TX packets Total count of packets transferred from the AP’s Ethernet interface Ethernet TX, Total TX packet errors Total count of packets transmitted out of the AP’s Ethernet interface with errors due to collisions, CRC errors, or irregular packet size. Ethernet TX, Total TX packet drops Total count of packets dropped prior to sending out of the AP’s Ethernet interface due to Ethernet setup or filtering issues. Ethernet TX, TX – Multicast Packets Total count of multicast packets sent via the AP’s Ethernet interface Ethernet TX, TX – Broadcast Packets Total count of broadcast packets sent via the AP’s Ethernet interface Ethernet RX, Total RX Total count of bytes received by the AP’s Ethernet interface Ethernet RX, Total RX packets Total count of packets received by the AP’s Ethernet interface 118
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Attribute Meaning Ethernet RX, Total RX packet errors Total count of packets received by the AP’s Ethernet interface with errors due to collisions, CRC errors, or irregular packet size. Ethernet RX, Total RX packet drops Total count of packets dropped prior to sending out of the AP’s wireless interface due to Ethernet setup or filtering issues. Ethernet RX, RX – Multicast Packets Total count of multicast packets received via the AP’s Ethernet interface. Ethernet RX, RX – Broadcast Packets Total count of broadcast packets received via the AP’s Ethernet interface. Wireless Uplink, Total Kbit Counter Total count of packets received via the AP’s wireless interface in Kbits. Wireless Uplink, Total Packet Counter Total count of packets received via the AP’s wireless interface. Wireless Uplink, Error Drop Packet Counter Total count of packets dropped prior to sending out of the AP’s Ethernet interface due to RF errors (packet integrity error and other RF related packet error). Wireless Uplink, MultiBroadcast Kbit Counter Total count of multicast and broadcast packets received on the AP’s wireless interface in Kbits. Wireless Downlink, Total Kbit Counter Total count of packets transmitted out of the AP’s wireless interface in Kbits. Wireless Downlink, Total Packet Counter Total count of packets transmitted out of the AP’s wireless interface. Wireless Downlink, Error Drop Packet Counter Total count of packets dropped after transmitting out of the AP’s Wireless interface due to RF errors (No acknowledgement and other RF related packet error). Wireless Downlink, Capacity Drop Packet Counter Total count of packets dropped after transmitting out of the AP’s Wireless interface due to capacity issues (data buffer/queue overflow or other performance or internal packet errors). Wireless Downlink, MultiBroadcast Kbit Counter Total count of multicast and broadcast packets transmitted out of the AP’s wireless interface in Kbits. Wireless Downlink, Retransmission Packet Counter Total count of packets retransmitted after transmitting out of the AP’s Wireless interface due to RF errors (No acknowledgement and other RF related packet error). 119
CAMBIUM NETWORKS AP System Status page Use the System Status page to reference key system information. Figure 28 AP System Status page Table 52 AP System Status page attributes Attribute Meaning Software Version Current operating version of software on the device. This listing is also present on the GUI footer bar (which contains a hyperlink to download new system software). Hardware Version Board hardware version information. Firmware Version U-Boot version information. Active SW Bank Version The currently operating version of software on the ePMP device. Inactive SW Bank Version The backup software version on the ePMP device, used upon failure of the active bank. Two software upgrades in sequence will update both the Active SW Bank Version and the Inactive SW Bank Version. Date and Time Current date and time, subject to time zone offsets introduced by the configuration of the device Time Zone parameter. Until a valid NTP server is configured, this field will display the time configured from the factory. System Uptime The total system uptime since the last device reset. 120
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Attribute Meaning Wireless MAC Address The hardware address of the device wireless interface. LAN MAC Address The hardware address of the device LAN (Ethernet) interface. DFS Status N/A: DFS operation is not required for the region configured in parameter Country Code. Channel Availability Check: Prior to transmitting, the device must check the configured Frequency Carrier for radar pulses for 60 seconds). If no radar pulses are detected, the device transitions to state In-Service Monitoring. In-Service Monitoring: Radio is transmitting and receiving normally while monitoring for radar pulses which require a channel move. Radar Signal Detected: The receiver has detected a valid radar pulse and is carrying out detect-and-avoid mechanisms (moving to an alternate channel). In-Service Monitoring at Alternative Channel: The radio has detected a radar pulse and has moved operation to a frequency configured in DFS Alternative Frequency Carrier 1 or DFS Alternative Frequency Carrier 2. System Not In Service due to DFS: The radio has detected a radar pulse and has failed channel availability checks on all alternative frequencies. The non-occupancy time for the radio frequencies in which radar was detected is 30 minutes. 121
CAMBIUM NETWORKS AP Wireless Status page Use the Wireless Status page to reference key information about the radio’s wireless interface and connected STAs. Figure 29 AP Wireless Status page Table 53 AP Wireless Status page attributes Attribute Meaning Operating Frequency The current frequency at which the AP is operating. Transmitter Output Power The current power level at which the AP is transmitting. Registered STA Count The total count of STAs which are currently registered to the AP. Ethernet Interface (LAN) Up: The Ethernet (LAN) interface is functioning properly. Down: The Ethernet (LAN) interface has encountered an error and is not servicing traffic. 122
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Attribute Meaning Wireless Interface (WAN) Up: The radio (WAN) interface is functioning properly. Down: The radio (WAN) interface has encountered an error and is not servicing traffic. Current Country Code The current country code at which the AP is operating. Connected STA List Use the Connected STA List table to monitor registered STAs and their key RF status and statistics information. STA MAC Address The address of the STA wireless interface. UL RSSI The uplink Received Signal Strength Indicator, which is a measurement of the power level being received by the AP’s antenna. Estimated DL RSSI The downlink Received Signal Strength Indicator, which is an estimated measurement of the power level being received by the STA’s antenna. UL SNR The uplink Signal to Noise Ratio, which is an expression of the carrier signal quality with respect to signal noise. DL SNR The downlink Signal to Noise Ratio, which is an expression of the carrier signal quality with respect to signal noise. UL MCS Mode Modulation and Coding Scheme – indicates the modulation mode used for the radio uplink, based on radio conditions (MCS 1, 9-15). DL MCS Mode Modulation and Coding Scheme – indicates the modulation mode used for the radio downlink, based on radio conditions (MCS 1, 9-15). Profile The current MIR profile number to which the STA is configured. UL Rate The current Maximum Information Rate (in Kbps) on the Uplink to which the STA is configured. DL Rate The current Maximum Information Rate (in Kbps) on the Downlink to which the STA is configured. 123
CAMBIUM NETWORKS AP GPS Status page Use the GPS Status page to reference key information about the radio’s configured GPS coordinates. Figure 30 AP GPS Status page Table 54 AP GPS Status page attributes Attribute Meaning Internal GPS Latitude On a GPS Synchronized ePMP radio, the field is automatically populated with the Device Latitude information from the on-board GPS chip. 124
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Attribute Meaning Internal GPS Longitude On a GPS Synchronized ePMP radio, the field is automatically populated with the Device Longitude information from the on-board GPS chip. Internal GPS Height On a GPS Synchronized ePMP radio, the field is automatically populated with the Device height above sea level from the on-board GPS chip. Internal GPS Time On a GPS Synchronized ePMP radio, the field is automatically populated with the time from the on-board GPS chip. Internal GPS Number of Tracked Satellites On a GPS Synchronized ePMP radio, the field indicates the number of satellites current tracked by the on-board GPS chip. Internal GPS Number of Visible Satellites On a GPS Synchronized ePMP radio, the field indicates the number of satellites visible to the on-board GPS chip. Satellites The Satellites table provides information about each satellite that is visible or tracked along with the Satellite ID and Signal to Noise Ratio (SNR) of the satellite. 125
CAMBIUM NETWORKS AP Network Status page Use the AP Network Status page to reference key information about the device network status. Figure 31 AP Network Status page Table 55 AP Network Status page attributes Attribute Meaning Device IP Address Mode The current IP Address mode of the device (static or DHCP). Ethernet Interface (LAN) Up: The device Ethernet interface is functioning and passing data. Down: The device Ethernet interface has encountered an error disallowing full operation. Reset the device to reinitiate the Ethernet interface. Device IP address (LAN) The currently configured Ethernet IP address, used for device management. IP Subnet Mask (LAN) The currently configured device IP subnet mask. Wireless Interface (WAN) Up: The device wireless interface is functioning and passing data Down: The device wireless interface has encountered an error disallowing full operation. Reset the device to reinitiate the wireless interface. 126
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Attribute Meaning Device IP address (WAN) Currently unused. IP Subnet Mask (WAN) Currently unused. Gateway IP Address The IP address of a computer on the current network that acts as a gateway. A gateway acts as an entrance and exit to packets from and to other networks. DNS Server IP Address The IP address of the server used for DNS resolution. LAN MTU The currently configured Maximum Transmission Unit for the AP’s Ethernet (LAN) interface. Larger MTU configurations can enable the network to operate with greater efficiency, but in the case of retransmissions due to packet errors, efficiency is reduced since large packets must be resent in the event of an error. 127
CAMBIUM NETWORKS AP System Log page Use the AP System Log page to view the device system log and to download the log file to the accessing PC/device. Figure 32 AP System Log page Table 56 AP System Log attributes Attribute Meaning Display System Log on Web Interface Enabled: The system log file is displayed on the management GUI. Disabled: The system log file is hidden on the management GUI. Download full syslog file Use this button to download the full system log file to a connected PC/device. 128
CAMBIUM NETWORKS AP TOOLS MENU The AP Tools menu provides several options for upgrading device software, configuration backup/restore, analyzing RF spectrum, testing device throughput, and running ping and traceroute tests. • AP Software Upgrade page on page 130 • AP Factory Default page on page 132 • AP Spectrum Analyzer page on page 133 • AP Throughput Test page on page 136 • AP Ping page on page 137 • AP Traceroute page on page 138 129
CAMBIUM NETWORKS AP Software Upgrade page Use the AP Software Upgrade page to update the device radio software to take advantage of new software features and improvements. Caution Read the Release Notes associated with each software release. Figure 33 AP Software Upgrade page Table 57 AP Software Upgrade attributes Attribute Meaning Software Version The current operating software version Firmware Version The current U-Boot version SW Upgrade Option From URL: A webserver may be used to retrieve software upgrade packages (downloaded to the device via the webserver). For example, if a webserver is running at IP address 192.168.2.1 and the software upgrade packages are located in the home directory, an operator may select option From URL and configure the Software Upgrade Source Info field to http://192.168.2.1/<software_upgrade_package> From Local File: Click Browse to select the local file containing the software upgrade package. Software Upgrade Local File Click Browse to select a local file (located on the device accessing the web management interface) for upgrading the device software. To upgrade the device software from a local file (or network-accessible file), follow this: Procedure: 1 Download the software upgrade packages from https://support.cambiumnetworks.com/files/epmp 130
CAMBIUM NETWORKS 2 Clear the accessing browser cache 3 On the device GUI, navigate to Tools => Software Upgrade 4 Select the SW Upgrade Option which represents the location of your software upgrade packages 5 Based on the configuration of SW Upgrade Option, enter either the Software Upgrade Source Info or click the Browse button and locate the software package 6 Click Upgrade 7 When the upgrade completes successfully, click the Reset icon 131
CAMBIUM NETWORKS AP Factory Default page Use the AP Factory Default page to reset the device to its factory default configuration. For more factory defaulting methods, see: • Using the device external reset button on page 206 • Resetting the AP or STA to factory defaults by power cycling on page 207 Figure 34 AP Factory Default page Table 58 AP Software Upgrade attributes Attribute Meaning Reset to Factory Default Configuration Use this button to reset the device to its factory default configuration Caution A reset to factory default configuration resets all device parameters. The AP will cease to transmit and any registered STAs will lose their session. 132
CAMBIUM NETWORKS AP Spectrum Analyzer page Use the AP Spectrum Analyzer page to configure AP spectrum analyzer parameters and to download the spectrum analyzer tool. To download the spectrum analyzer tool, the AP Device Mode must be set to Spectrum Analyzer. Java Runtime Environment is required to run the AP spectrum analyzer. Caution Conducting spectrum analysis causes the AP to enter scan mode and the AP drops all RF connections. Vary the days and times when you analyze the spectrum in an area. The RF environment can change throughout the day or throughout the week. To conduct a spectrum analysis, follow this: Required Software: • Java Run-time Environment (JRE) Procedure: 1 On the AP GUI, navigate to Configure => System 2 Configure Device mode to Spectrum Analyzer 3 Click the Save button 4 Click the Reset button 5 Login to the AP GUI, then navigate to Tools => Spectrum Analyzer 6 Click Download Spectrum Analyzer Tool 7 Locate the folder to which the spectrum analyzer tool was saved, and double-click on file csa.jnlp to launch the tool 8 If a security warning window appears, tick the checkbox next to “I accept the risk and want to run this application” 133
CAMBIUM NETWORKS 9 In the security warning window, click Run The spectrum analyzer interface is displayed 10 Click Range to configure the range of frequencies to scan. 11 Click Start Scan to begin scanning Display of the average, peak, current, and minimum power levels for the configured range Statistical display of the number of times each frequency in the range was scanned Spectrogram display of the energy levels detected throughout the configured range, over time 134
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Once the scanning completes, follow these steps to return the device to AP operation: Procedure: 1 In the spectrum analyzer application, click Stop Scan 2 Close the spectrum analyzer application by clicking File => Exit 3 On the AP GUI, navigate to Configure => System 4 Configure Device Mode to AP 5 Click the Save button 6 Click the Reset button 135
CAMBIUM NETWORKS AP Throughput Test page Use the AP Throughput Test page to conduct a simple test of AP wireless throughput to any one of the connected STAs. This allows you to determine the throughput that can be expected on a particular link without having to use external tools. Figure 35 AP Throughput Test page Table 59 AP Throughput Test attributes Attribute Meaning Wireless MAC Address of Connected STA Enter the MAC Address of one of the connected STAs or simply click the “paste” button of the STA desired in the “Connected STA List”. Packet Size Choose the Packet Size to use for the throughput test. Time Duration Choose the Time Duration in seconds to use for the throughput test. DL Throughput This field indicates the result of the throughput test on the downlink, in Mbps. UL Throughput This field indicates the result of the throughput test on the uplink, in Mbps. Connected STA list Use the Connected STA List table to monitor registered STAs and their key RF status and statistics information. Click “paste” on the STA that is desired to be used in the throughput test. 136
CAMBIUM NETWORKS AP Ping page Use the AP Ping page to conduct a simple test of AP IP connectivity to other devices which are reachable from the network. If no ping response is received or if “Destination Host Unreachable” is reported, the target may be down, there may be no route back to the AP, or there may be a failure in the network hardware (i.e. DNS server failure). Figure 36 AP Ping page Table 60 AP Ping attributes Attribute Meaning IP Address Enter the IP address of the ping target. Number of packets (-c) Enter the total number of ping requests to send to the target. Buffer size (-s) Enter the number of data bytes to be sent. TTL (-t) Set the IP Time-To-Live (TTL) for multicast packets. This flag applies if the ping target is a multicast address. 137
CAMBIUM NETWORKS AP Traceroute page Use the AP Traceroute page to display the route (path) and associated diagnostics for IP connectivity between the AP and the destination specified. Figure 37 AP Traceroute page Table 61 AP Traceroute attributes Attribute Meaning IP Address Enter the IP address of the target of the traceroute diagnostic. Fragmentation (-F) ON: Allow source and target to fragment probe packets. OFF: Do not fragment probe packets (on source or target). Trace method (-l) ICMP ECHO: Use ICMP ECHO for traceroute probes. UDP: Use UDP for traceroute probes. Display TTL (-l) ON: Display TTL values for each hop on the route. OFF: Suppress display of TTL values for each hop on the route. Verbose (-v) ON: ICMP packets other than TIME_EXCEEDED and UNREACHABLE are displayed in the output. OFF: Suppress display of extraneous ICMP messaging. 138
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Using the STA menu options Use the menu navigation bar in the top and left panels to navigate to each web page. Table 45 lists the functional areas that may be accessed from each menu option. Some of the parameters are only displayed for specific system configurations. Table 62 Functional areas accessed from each menu option Menu option Menu Details Configure STA Configuration menu on page 140 Radio STA Radio page on page 141 Quality of Service STA Quality of Service page on page 144 System STA System page on page 148 Network STA Network page on page 152 Security STA Security page on page 161 Monitor STA Monitor menu on page 165 Performance STA Performance page on page 166 System Status STA System Status page on page 169 Wireless Status STA Wireless Status page on page 171 Network Status STA Network Status page on page 174 System Log STA System Log page on page 176 Tools STA Tools menu on page 177 Software Upgrade STA Software Upgrade page on page 178 Factory Default STA Factory Default page on page 180 Spectrum Analyzer STA Spectrum Analyzer page on page 181 Throughput Test STA Throughput Test page on page 184 Ping STA Ping page on page 185 Traceroute STA Traceroute page on page 186 Quick Start Configuring STA units using the Quick Start menu on page 86 139
CAMBIUM NETWORKS STA CONFIGURATION MENU Use the Configuration menu to access all applicable device configuration parameters. The configuration menu contains the following pages: • STA Radio page on page 141 • STA Quality of Service page on page 144 • STA System page on page 148 • STA Network page on page 152 • STA Security page on page 161 140
CAMBIUM NETWORKS STA Radio page Use the Radio page to configure the device radio interface parameters. Caution Modifying radio parameters may result in a wireless outage. Plan configuration modifications accordingly. Figure 38 STA Radio page 141
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Table 63 STA Radio Configuration attributes Attribute Meaning Country Code The STA automatically inherits the Country Code setting of the AP (except for US-locked devices). Country Code settings affect the radios in the following ways: • Maximum transmit power limiting (based on radio transmitter power plus configured antenna gain) • DFS operation is enabled based on the configured country code, if applicable • Frequency selection is based on local regulatory limits Length Unit The unit of measurement used for reporting Distance from AP. Scan Channel Bandwidth 20 MHz: The STA scans and operates with a 20 MHz-wide channel. To associate to an AP, the AP must have the same channel bandwidth as the STA. 40 MHz: The STA scans and operates with a 40 MHz-wide channel. To associate to an AP, the AP must have the same channel bandwidth as the STA. 20/40 MHz: The STA scans both 20 MHz and 40 MHz wide channels, based on the configured Radio Frequency 20 MHz Scan List and the configured Radio Frequency 40 MHz Scan List. Antenna Gain This value represents the amount of gain introduced by the units internal antenna. This parameter is read-only. Preferred AP List The Preferred AP List is comprised of a list of up to 16 APs to which the STA sequentially attempts registration. For each AP configured, if authentication is required, enter a Pre-shared Key associated with the configured AP SSID. AP SSID Enter the AP Name (SSID) of the AP to which registration will be attempted. Authentication Types Enter the type of authentication preferred, whether EAP-TTLS, WPA2, Open or a combination of the three. WPA2 Pre-shared Key If encryption is enabled on the AP, enter the Pre-shared Key which matches the Pre-shared Key configured on the AP. 142
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Attribute Meaning Radio Frequency 20 MHz Scan List Select the frequencies for the STA to scan to attempt AP network entry (with 20 MHz wide channel). To register to an AP, the STA must be configured with the same frequency that is configured on the AP (AP parameter Frequency Carrier). Note If operating in a DFS-required region, ensure that the STA is also configured with the same frequencies as are configured in the AP’s DFS Alternate Frequency Carrier 1 and DFS Alternate Frequency Carrier 2 parameters. Radio Frequency 40 MHz Scan List Select the frequencies for the STA to scan to attempt AP network entry (with 40 MHz wide channel). To register to an AP, the STA must be configured with the same frequency that is configured on the AP (AP parameter Frequency Carrier). Note If operating in a DFS-required region, ensure that the STA is also configured with the same frequencies as are configured in the AP’s DFS Alternate Frequency Carrier 1 and DFS Alternate Frequency Carrier 2 parameters. AP RSSI Threshold Set this parameter to the minimum Received Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI) at the STA required for the STA to attempt registration to an AP. For example, if the AP RSSI Threshold is set to -80 dBm, and the STA is receiving the AP signal at -85 dBm (RSSI = -85 dBm), the STA will not attempt to register to the AP. AP SNR Threshold Set this parameter to the minimum Signal-to-Noise Ratio (SNR) at the STA required for the STA to attempt registration to an AP. For example, if the AP SNR Threshold is set to 30 dB and the STA is calculating its DL CINR as 25 dB, the STA will not attempt to register to the AP. 143
CAMBIUM NETWORKS STA Quality of Service page The ePMP platform supports three QoS priority levels using an air-fairness, priority-based starvation avoidance scheduling algorithm: Priority Level ePMP Traffic Priority Label Highest Priority (Served first) VOIP Medium Priority (Served once highest priority traffic is sent) High Lowest Priority (Serviced once Highest and Medium priority traffic is sent) Low • VoIP Priority (only utilized when VOIP Enable is set to Enabled) • High Priority • Low Priority By default, all traffic passed over the air interface is low priority. The STA’s Quality of Service page may be utilized to map traffic to certain priority levels using QoS classification rules. The rules included in the table are enforced starting with the first row of the table. Caution Each additional traffic classification rule increases device CPU utilization. Careful network planning is required to efficiently use the device processor. The ePMP platform also supports radio data rate limiting (Maximum Information Rate, or MIR) based on the configuration of the MIR table. Operators may add up to 16 MIR profiles on the AP, each with unique limits for uplink and downlink data rates. The STA field MIR Profile Setting is used to configure the appropriate MIR profile for limiting the STA’s data rate. Priority 144
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Figure 39 STA Quality of Service page Table 64 STA Radio Configuration attributes Attribute Meaning MIR Profile Setting Configure the desired MIR (Maximum Information Rate) profile for STA operation. This profile must be configured on the AP, otherwise the default profile (0) is used. QoS Enable Enabled: The QoS Classification Rules table is editable and is utilized by the device to classify traffic. Disabled: The QoS Classification Rules table is greyed-out and all traffic is sent at one priority level. Broadcast Priority Low Priority: All Broadcast traffic sent over the uplink is prioritized as low priority, and will be delivered to the AP after scheduled high priority and VoIP traffic. High Priority: All Broadcast traffic sent over the uplink is prioritized as high priority, and will be scheduled for delivery to the AP before low priority traffic but after VoIP traffic. Multicast Priority Low Priority: All Multicast traffic sent over the uplink is prioritized as low priority, and will be delivered to the AP after scheduled high priority and VoIP traffic. High Priority: All Multicast traffic sent over the uplink is prioritized as high priority, and will be scheduled for delivery to the AP before low priority traffic but after VoIP traffic. 145
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Attribute Meaning VOIP Enable Enabled: When enabled, two entries are automatically added to the first and second rows of the QoS Classification Rules table, one with Rule Type CoS (5) and one with Rule Type DSCP (46). The addition of these rules ensures that VoIP traffic passed over the radio downlink is given highest priority. The CoS and DSCP values may be modified to accommodate non-standard VoIP equipment. STA Priority Normal: STA will give priority to the packets as defined in the rules which could be "Low", "High", or "VoIP". "Normal" priority will allow data to be added to the appropriate "High", "Low", and "VoIP" queues based on the QoS rules. This is the default setting. If no rule is defined for a packet, then the packet priority will be “Low”. High: STA will place all data other than VoIP in the "High" queue. It will be given higher priority than STAs configured with “Low” and “Normal” when there is contention for bandwidth under the AP. Low: "Low" priority will place all data that is not VoIP in "Low" priority queue. It will be given lower priority than STAs configured with “High” when there is contention for bandwidth under the same AP. "VoIP" queue is the highest priority queue followed by "High" queue and then by "Low" queue. Higher priority queues have preference over lower priority queues, but will not starve them. QoS Classification Rules The QoS Classification Rules table contains all of the rules enforced by the device when passing traffic over the radio downlink. Traffic passed through the device is matched against each rule in the table; when a match is made the traffic is sent over the radio link using the priority defined in column Traffic Priority. 146
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Attribute Meaning Rule Type DSCP: Differentiated Services Code Point; traffic prioritization is based on the 6-bit Differentiated Services field in the IP header present in the Ethernet frame header in the packet ingress of the Ethernet port. CoS: Class of Service; traffic prioritization is based on the 3-bit header present in the 802.1Q VLAN-tagged Ethernet frame header in the packet ingressing the STA’s Ethernet port. VLAN ID: Traffic prioritization is based on the VLAN ID of the packet ingressing the STA’s Ethernet port. EtherType: Traffic prioritization is based on the two octet Ethertype field in the Ethernet frame ingressing the STA’s Ethernet port. The Ethertype is used to identify the protocol of the data in the payload of the Ethernet frame. IP: Traffic prioritization is based on the source and/or destination IP addresses of the packet ingress of the STA’s Ethernet port. A sub.net mask may be included to define a range of IP addresses to match. MAC: Traffic prioritization is based on the source and/or destination MAC addresses of the packet ingress of the STA’s Ethernet port. A mask may be included to define a range of MAC addresses to match. The mask is made up of a hex representation of a series of 1s to start the mask and 0s that end the mask. A 1 may not follow a 0. Thus, FF:FF:FF:FF:00:00 is allowed, but FF:00:FF:FF:FF:FF is not. The MAC address is combined with the mask to define the range of allowed MAC addresses. Rule Details The Rule Details column is used to configure each classification rule specified in column Rule Type. Traffic Priority High: Traffic ingressing the STA’s Ethernet port is prioritized as “high priority” for sending over the radio link (traffic will be sent after VOIP-classified traffic, but before Low-classified traffic) Low: Traffic ingressing the STA’s Ethernet port is prioritized as “low priority” for sending over the radio link (traffic will be sent after VOIP-classified and High-classified traffic is sent). 147
CAMBIUM NETWORKS STA System page The STA’s System page is used to configure system parameters, services, time settings, SNMP, and syslog. Figure 40 STA System page 148
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Table 65 STA System attributes Attribute Meaning Device Mode All ePMP devices may be configured to operate in one of three modes: AP: The device will operate as an AP STA: The device will operate as an STA Spectrum Analyzer: The devices will operate in Spectrum Analyzer mode, allowing the operator to download the spectrum analyzer tool. Device Name The Device Name is used to identify the STA on the network, and may be retrieved by a NMS such as the Cambium Network Services Server (CNSS). WEB Page Auto Update Configure the interval for which the device retrieves system statistics for display on the management interface. For example, if this setting is configured to 5 seconds, the statistics and status parameters displayed on the management interface will be refreshed every 5 seconds. Web Service HTTP: Access to the device management GUI is conducted via HTTP HTTPS: Access to the device management GUI is conducted via HTTPS HTTP Port If Web Service is set to HTTP, configure the port which the device uses to service incoming HTTP requests for management GUI access. HTTPS Port If Web Service is set to HTTPS, configure the port which the device uses to service incoming HTTPS requests for management GUI access. NTP Server IP Address Mode Static: The device retrieves NTP time data from the servers configured in fields NTP Server IP Address DHCP: The device retrieves NTP time data from the server IP issued via a network DHCP server. NTP Server 1,2 IP Address Configure primary and secondary NTP server IP addresses from which the device will retrieve time and date information. Time Zone The Time Zone option may be used to offset the received NTP time to match the operator’s local time zone. Device Latitude Configure Latitude information for the device in decimal format. Device Longitude Configure Longitude information for the device in decimal format. Device Height Configure the Height above sea level information for the device, in meters. Internal GPS Height On a GPS Synchronized ePMP radio, the field is automatically populated with the Device height above sea level from the on-board GPS chip. 149
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Attribute Meaning Administrator, Installer, Home User, Readonly Username Read-only listing of available login levels. • ADMINISTRATOR, full read write permissions. • INSTALLER, permissions to read and write parameters applicable to unit installation and monitoring. • HOME USER, permissions only to access pertinent information for support purposes. • READONLY, permissions only to view the Monitor page. Administrator, Installer, Home User Disabled: The disabled user is not granted access to the device management interface. The administrator user level cannot be disabled. Enabled: The user is granted access to the device management interface. Administrator, Installer, Home User, Readonly Password Configure a custom password configuration for each user to secure the device. The password character display may be toggled using the visibility icon . Read-only Community String Specify a control string that can allow a Network Management Station (NMS) such as the Cambium Networks Services Server (CNSS) to read SNMP information. No spaces are allowed in this string. This password will never authenticate an SNMP user or an NMS to read/write access. The SNMP Read-only Community String value is clear text and is readable by a packet monitor. Read-write Community String Specify a control string that can allow a Network Management Station (NMS) to access SNMP information. No spaces are allowed in this string. Send SNMP Traps Disabled: With this setting, the radio will not send traps Enabled: Setting this will enable the radio to send SNMP traps to the configured SNMP Trap Server. Trap Community String Specify a control string to match the Trap Community String on the SNMP Trap server. No spaces are allowed in this string. SNMP Trap Servers The SNMP Trap Servers table contains all of the SNMP Trap servers the radio can send SNMP traps. Configure the IP Address which the device uses to send SNMP traps. Trap Server Destination IP Address Specify up to four SNMP Trap Servers to which the device will send SNMP traps. Trap Server Destination Port Configure port which the device uses to send SNMP traps. 150
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Attribute Meaning System Name Specify a string to associate with the physical module. This parameter can be polled by the Cambium Networks Services Server (CNSS) or an NMS. System Description Specify a description string to associate with the physical module. This parameter can be polled by the Cambium Networks Services Server (CNSS) or an NMS. Syslog Server IP 1-4 Specify up to four syslog servers to which the device sends syslog messages. System Log Mask Configure the levels of syslog messages which the devices send to the servers configured in parameters Syslog Server IP 1-4 151
CAMBIUM NETWORKS STA Network page The STA’s Network page is used to configure system networking parameters and VLAN parameters. Parameter availability is based on the configuration of the STA Network Mode parameter. Figure 41 STA Network page, NAT mode 152
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Table 66 STA Network attributes, NAT mode Attribute Meaning STA Network Mode NAT: The STA acts as a router and packets are forwarded or filtered based on their IP header (source or destination). Bridge: The STA acts as a switch, and packets are forwarded or filtered based on their MAC destination address. Device IP Address Mode Static: Wireless IP addressing is configured manually in fields Device IP Address, Device IP Subnet Mask, Device Gateway IP Address, Primary DNS IP Address and Secondary DNS IP Address DHCP: Device management IP addressing (IP address, subnet mask, gateway, and DNS server) is assigned via a network DHCP server. Device IP Address Wireless Internet protocol (IP) address. This address is used by the family of Internet protocols to uniquely identify this unit on a network. Device IP Subnet Mask Defines the address range of the connected IP network. For example, if Device IP Address is configured to 192.168.2.1 and Device IP Subnet Mask is configured to 255.255.255.0, the device wireless interface will belong to subnet 192.168.2.X. Device Gateway IP Address Configure the IP address of a computer on the current network that acts as a gateway. A gateway acts as an entrance and exit to packets from and to other networks. Primary DNS IP Address Configure The IP address of the primary server used for DNS resolution. Secondary DNS IP Address Configure The IP address of the secondary server used for DNS resolution. MTU Maximum Transmission Unit; the size in bytes of the largest data unit that the device is configured to process. Larger MTU configurations can enable the network to operate with greater efficiency, but in the case of retransmissions due to packet errors, efficiency is reduced since large packets must be resent in the event of an error. STP Disabled: When disabled, Spanning Tree Protocol (802.1d) functionality is disabled at the STA. Enabled: When enabled, Spanning Tree Protocol (802.1d) functionality is enabled at the STA, allowing for the prevention of Ethernet bridge loops. LAN IP Address Mode Static: Device management IP addressing is configured manually in fields Device IP Address (LAN), IP Subnet Mask (LAN), Gateway IP Address (LAN), and DNS Server IP Address (LAN) LAN IP Addess Internet protocol (IP) address. This address is used by the family of Internet protocols to uniquely identify this unit on a network. 153
CAMBIUM NETWORKS LAN IP Subnet Mask Defines the address range of the connected IP network. For example, if Device IP Address (LAN) is configured to 192.168.2.1 and IP Subnet Mask (LAN) is configured to 255.255.255.0, the device will belong to subnet 192.168.2.X. LAN Gateway IP Address Configure the IP address of a computer on the current network that acts as a gateway. A gateway acts as an entrance and exit to packets from and to other networks. Local DHCP Server Disabled: Use this setting when STA is in NAT mode, to use the DHCP server to hand out IP addresses to its clients. Enabled: Use this setting when STA is in NAT mode, to use the STA’s local/onboard DHCP server to hand out IP addresses to its clients. Local DHCP Server IP Start Address Configure the first address which will be issued to a DHCP client. Upon additional DHCP requests, the Local DHCP Server IP Start Address will be incremented until Local DHCP Server IP End Address is reached. Local DHCP Server IP End Address Configure the final address which will be issued to a DHCP client. DHCP DNS Server IP Address Primary Configure the primary DNS Server IP address which will be used to configure DHCP clients (if Local DHCP Server is set to Enabled) DHCP DNS Server IP Address Secondary Configure the secondary DNS Server IP address which will be used to configure DHCP clients (if Local DHCP Server is set to Enabled) Local DHCP Lease Time Configure the time for which a DHCP IP address is leased. When the lease time expires, the DHCP client must renew IP addressing via DHCP request. DHCP Client List The DHCP Client List table identifies hardware situated below the STA which shall be issued DHCP IP addressing information. The STA acts as a DHCP server, responding to requests from hardware connected to the STA. MAC Configure the physical address of the device which will retrieve DHCP IP addressing information from the STA. IP Configure the IP address which will be assigned to the device. Name Configure a logical name for the device configured (i.e. VoIP Phone1, or Network Camera1). Port Forwarding Entry Enable The STA port forwarding functionality may be used to configure the STA to route external network services to an internal IP address so that end devices (situated below the STA) are reachable from external networks. Caution Opening ports for forwarding may introduce a network security risk. 154
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Port Forwarding Table The Port Forwarding Table is used to define which range of wireless ports are forwarded to which LAN (STA local network) IP addresses. Protocol UDP: Packet forwarding decisions are based on UDP packets TCP: Packet forwarding decisions are based on TCP packets WAN Port Begin Configure the beginning of the range of wireless ports to match for forwarding to LAN IP WAN Port End Configure the end of the range of wireless ports to match for forwarding to LAN IP LAN IP Configure the LAN IP of the device situated below the STA which will receive the packets forwarded based on the Port Forwarding Table configuration. PPPoE Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet: Used for encapsulating PPP frames inside Ethernet frames. Mode Disabled: Default. Enabled: Configure this field to “Enabled” to setup a PPPoE tunnel on the STA. PPPoE Service Name An optional entry to set a specific service name to connect to for the PPPoE session. If this is left blank the STA will accept the first service option that comes back from the Access Concentrator specified below, if any. This is limited to 32 characters. PPPoE Access Concentrator Name An optional entry to set a specific Access Concentrator to connect to for the PPPoE session. If this is blank, the STA will accept the first Access Concentrator which matches the service name (if specified). This is limited to 32 characters. PPPoE Authentication Type ALL: This means that CHAP authentication will be attempted first, then PAP authentication. The same password is used for both types. CHAP: This means that CHAP authentication will be attempted. PAP: This means that PAP authentication will be attempted. PPPoE Username This is the CHAP/PAP username that will be used. This is limited to 32 characters. PPPoE Password This is the CHAP/PAP password that will be used. This is limited to 32 characters. PPPoE MTU Size Maximum Transmission Unit; the size in bytes of the largest data unit that the device is configured to process inside the PPPoE tunnel. This field allows the operator to specify the largest MTU value to use in the PPPoE session, if PPPoE MSS Clamping is Enabled. The user will be able to enter an MTU value up to 1492. However, if the MTU determined in LCP negotiations is less than this user-specified value, the SM will use the smaller value as its MTU for the PPPoE link. 155
CAMBIUM NETWORKS PPPoE Keep Alive Time Configure the Keep Alive Time to allow the radio to keep the PPPoE session up after establishment. As an example, if this field is set to 5, the PPPoE client will send a keep alive message to the PPPoE server every 5 seconds. If there is no acknowledgement, it will send the keep alive message to the server 4 more times (for a total or 5 times) before tearing down the PPPoE session. Setting this to 12 will mean the keep alive message will be sent every 12 seconds and when there is no acknowledgement, the client will try for a total of 12 times every 12 seconds before tearing down the PPPoE session. PPPoE MSS Clamping Disabled: The STA PPPoE session will allow any MTU size determined by other devices in the PPPoE session during the LCP negotiations. Enabled: The STA PPPoE session will enforce a max MTU size determined by the PPPoE MTU Size setting for all devices in the PPPoE session during the LCP negotiations, unless one of the devices enforces a MTU setting that is smaller in value. De-Militarized Zone (DMZ) Disabled: No devices are configured to expose services to the local area network as well as the wide-area network. Enabled: When enabled, the device configured in DMZ IP Address may provide network services (web servers or FTP servers) to the network internal to the STA as well as the wide-area network (Internet). DMZ IP Address Configure the IP address of an STA-connected device which will be allowed to provide network services to the wide-area network. VLAN Enabled: A VLAN configuration establishes a logical group within the network. Each computer in the VLAN, regardless of initial or eventual physical location, has access to the same data based on the VLAN architecture. For the network operator, this provides flexibility in network segmentation, simpler management, and enhanced security. When the STA is in NAT mode, the VLAN configuration is applicable to both management and user data. Disabled: When disabled, all IP management and data traffic is allowed to the device. VLAN ID Configure this parameter to include the device’s management and user traffic on a separate VLAN network. 156
CAMBIUM NETWORKS VLAN Priority ePMP radios can prioritize VLAN traffic based on the eight priorities described in the IEEE 802.1p specification. Data VLAN Priority represents the VLAN Priority or Class of Service (CoS). Operators may use this prioritization field to give precedence to device user and management data. If the VLAN Priority field is configured, for traffic to traverse the device the accessing switch or end device must be configured to tag Ethernet frames with the VLAN ID value and the same priority values as configured in field VLAN Priority. For example, if VLAN ID is set to 100 and VLAN Priority is set to 5, the Ethernet frames sent to the STA to from a PC situated below the STA must be tagged with a VLAN ID value of 100 and Class of Service priority set to 5 to be sent over the air to the AP. If VLAN Priority is not configured (blank), for traffic to traverse the device the accessing switch or end device only needs to tag Ethernet frames with the same VLAN ID as is configured in the VLAN ID field. Figure 42 STA Network page, Bridge mode 157
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Table 67 STA Network attributes, Bridge mode Attribute Meaning STA Network Mode NAT: The STA acts as a router, and packets are forwarded or filtered based on their IP header (source or destination). Bridge: The STA acts as a switch, and packets are forwarded or filtered based on their MAC destination address Device IP address Mode Static: Device management IP addressing is configured manually in fields Device IP Address (LAN), IP Subnet Mask (LAN), Gateway IP Address (LAN), and DNS Server IP Address (LAN) DHCP: Device management IP addressing (IP address, subnet mask, gateway, and DNS server) is assigned via a network DHCP server, and parameters Device IP Address (LAN), IP Subnet Mask (LAN), Gateway IP Address (LAN), and DNS Server IP Address (LAN) are unused. Device IP Address Internet protocol (IP) address. This address is used by the family of Internet protocols to uniquely identify this unit on a network. Note If Device IP address Mode is set to DHCP and the device is unable to retrieve IP address information via DHCP, the device management IP is set to fallback IP 192.168.0.1 (AP mode), 192.168.0.2 (STA mode), 192.168.0.3 (Spectrum Analyzer mode) or the previously-configured static Device IP Address. Units may always be accessed via the Ethernet port with IP 10.1.1.254. Device IP Subnet Mask Defines the address range of the connected IP network. For example, if Device IP Address (LAN) is configured to 192.168.2.1 and IP Subnet Mask (LAN) is configured to 255.255.255.0, the device will belong to subnet 192.168.2.X. Device Gateway IP Address Configure the IP address of a computer on the current network that acts as a gateway. A gateway acts as an entrance and exit to packets from and to other networks. Primary DNS IP Address Configure The IP address of the primary server used for DNS resolution. Secondary DNS IP Address Configure The IP address of the secondary server used for DNS resolution. MTU Maximum Transmission Unit; the size in bytes of the largest data unit that the device is configured to process. Larger MTU configurations can enable the network to operate with greater efficiency, but in the case of retransmissions due to packet errors, efficiency is reduced since large packets must be resent in the event of an error. 158
CAMBIUM NETWORKS STP Disabled: When disabled, Spanning Tree Protocol (802.1d) functionality is disabled at the STA. Enabled: When enabled, Spanning Tree Protocol (802.1d) functionality is enabled at the STA, allowing for the prevention of Ethernet bridge loops. MGMT VLAN Enabled: The STA management interface can be assigned to a Management VLAN to separate management traffic (remote module management via SNMP or HTTP) from user traffic (such as internet browsing, voice, or video. Once the management interface is enabled for a VLAN, an STA’s management interface can be accessed only by packets tagged with a VLAN ID matching the management VLAN ID. A VLAN configuration establishes a logical group within the network. Each computer in the VLAN, regardless of initial or eventual physical location, has access to the same data based on the VLAN architecture. For the network operator, this provides flexibility in network segmentation, simpler management, and enhanced security. Disabled: When disabled, all IP management traffic is allowed to the device. MGMT VLAN ID Configure this parameter to include the device’s management traffic on a separate VLAN network. For example, if MGMT VLAN ID is set to 2, GUI access will only be allowed from IP packets tagged with VLAN ID 2. MGMT VLAN Priority ePMP radios can prioritize VLAN traffic based on the eight priorities described in the IEEE 802.1p specification. MGMT VLAN Priority represents the VLAN Priority or Class of Service (CoS). Operators may use this prioritization field to give precedence to device management traffic. If the MGMT VLAN Priority field is configured, to access the STA GUI the accessing switch or end device must be configured to tag Ethernet frames with the MGMT VLAN ID value and the same priority values as configured in field MGMT VLAN Priority. For example, if MGMT VLAN ID is set to 100 and MGMT VLAN Priority is set to 5, the Ethernet frames sent to the STA to access the GUI must be tagged with a VLAN ID value of 100 and Class of Service priority set to 5. If MGMT VLAN Priority is not configured (blank), to access the STA GUI the accessing switch or end device only needs to tag Ethernet frames with the same VLAN ID as is configured in the MGMT VLAN ID field. Data VLAN ID Configure this parameter to include the device’s user traffic (i.e. Internet browsing, VoIP, or video) on a separate VLAN network. For example, if Data VLAN ID is set to 2, user data (i.e. Internet browsing, video) is allowed only from IP packets tagged with VLAN ID 2. 159
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Data VLAN Priority ePMP radios can prioritize VLAN traffic based on the eight priorities described in the IEEE 802.1p specification. Data VLAN Priority represents the VLAN Priority or Class of Service (CoS). Operators may use this prioritization field to give precedence to device user data. If the Data VLAN Priority field is configured, for user traffic to traverse the device the accessing switch or end device must be configured to tag Ethernet frames with the Data VLAN ID value and the same priority values as configured in field Data VLAN Priority. For example, if Data VLAN ID is set to 100 and Data VLAN Priority is set to 5, the user traffic Ethernet frames sent to the STA to from a PC situated below the STA must be tagged with a VLAN ID value of 100 and Class of Service priority set to 5 to be sent over the air to the AP. If Data VLAN Priority is not configured (blank), for user traffic to traverse the device the accessing switch or end device only needs to tag Ethernet frames with the same VLAN ID as is configured in the Data VLAN ID field. VLAN Membership Table Configure the STA VLAN Membership Table to include the STA in one or more VLANs. When the STA receives a packet tagged with a VLAN ID which is contained in the STA VLAN Membership Table, the packet is forwarded over the air interface to the AP. When the STA receives a packet tagged with a VLAN ID which is not present in the STA VLAN Membership Table, the frame is dropped. 160
CAMBIUM NETWORKS STA Security page The STA’s Security page is used to configure system security features including STA authentication and Layer2/Layer3 Firewall rules. Caution If a device firewall rule is added with Action set to Deny and Interface set to LAN or WAN and no other rule attribute are configured, the device will drop all Ethernet or wireless traffic, respectively. Ensure that all firewall rules are specific to the type of traffic which must be denied, and that no rules exist in the devices with only Action set to Deny and Interface set to LAN or WAN. To regain access to the device, perform a factory default. Figure 43 STA Security page 161
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Table 68 STA Security attributes Attribute Meaning Authentication Types Enter the type of authentication preferred, whether EAP-TTLS, WPA2, Open or a combination of the three. WPA2 Pre-shared Key Configure this key on the AP, and then configure each of the network STAs with this key to complete the authentication configuration. This key must be between 8 to 128 symbols. EAP-TTLS Username Configure the EAP-TTLS Username to match the credentials on the Radius server being used for the network. EAP-TTLS Password Configure the EAP-TTLS Password to match the credentials on the Radius server being used for the network. Authentication Identity String Configure this Identity string to match the credentials on the Radius server being used for the network. Default value for this parameter is “anonymous”. Authentication Identity Realm Configure this Identity string to match the credentials on the Radius server being used for the network. Default value for this parameter is “cambiumnetworks.com”. Default Root Certificate Default EAP-TTLS root certificate that must match the certificate on the Radius server Default pmp450 Root Certificate PMP 450 default EAP-TTLS root certificate to match the certificate on the Radius server used with current PMP 450 deployments. User Provisioned Root Certificate 1 Import a user certificate if a certificate different from the default certificates is needed. User Provisioned Root Certificate 2 Import a second user certificate if a certificate different from the default or 1st user provisioned certificate is needed. Layer 2 Firewall Entry Enable/Disable Enabled: Modifications to the Layer 2 Firewall Table are allowed and rules are enforced. Disabled: Modifications to the Layer 2 Firewall Table are not allowed and rules are not enforced. Layer 2 Firewall Table The Layer 2 firewall table may be used to configure rules matching layer 2 (MAC layer) traffic which result in forwarding or dropping the traffic over the radio link or Ethernet interface. Rule Details, Name Assign a logical name to the firewall rule based on the intended rule operation (i.e. “Deny all WLAN traffic from VLAN ID 100”). Rule Details, Action Accept: Layer 2 traffic matching the rule details are forwarded. Deny: Layer 2 traffic matching the rule details are dropped at the device. 162
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Rule Details, Interface WLAN: When this option is selected, firewall rules are applied to traffic incoming on the device radio interface (WLAN). Depending on the setting of the Action parameter, traffic matching the rule details will either be forwarded to the LAN (Ethernet) interface or dropped at the device. LAN: When this option is selected, firewall rules are applied to traffic incoming on the device Ethernet interface (LAN). Depending on the setting of the Action parameter, traffic matching the rule details will be either forwarded to the WAN (radio) interface or dropped at the device Rule Details, Log On: When a firewall rule is matched, a resulting system log message is generated Off: When a firewall rule is matched, no system log messaging is generated Rule Details, EtherType Rule matching is based on the two octet Ethertype field in the Ethernet frame. The Ethertype is used to identify the protocol of the data in the payload of the Ethernet frame. Rule Details, VLAN ID Rule matching is based on the VLAN ID of the packet Rule Details, Src MAC Firewall rule matching is based on the source MAC address of the packet Rule Details, Src Mask A mask may be included to define a range of MAC addresses to match. The mask is made up of a hex representation of a series of 1s to start the mask and 0s that end the mask. A 1 may not follow a 0. Thus, FF:FF:FF:FF:00:00 is allowed, but FF:00:FF:FF:FF:FF is not. The MAC address is combined with the mask to define the range of allowed MAC addresses. Rule Details, Dest MAC Firewall rule matching is based on the destination MAC address of the packet Rule Details, Dest Mask A mask may be included to define a range of MAC addresses to match. The mask is made up of a hex representation of a series of 1s to start the mask and 0s that end the mask. A 1 may not follow a 0. Thus, FF:FF:FF:FF:00:00 is allowed, but FF:00:FF:FF:FF:FF is not. The MAC address is combined with the mask to define the range of allowed MAC addresses. Layer 3 Firewall Entry Enable/Disable Enabled: Modifications to the Layer 3 Firewall Table are allowed and rules are enforced Disabled: Modifications to the Layer 3 Firewall Table are not allowed and rules are not enforced Layer 3 Firewall Table The Layer 3 firewall table may be used to configure rules matching layer 3 (IP layer) traffic which result in forwarding or dropping the traffic over the radio link or Ethernet interface. 163
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Rule Details, Name Assign a logical name to the firewall rule based on the intended rule operation (i.e. “Deny all WLAN traffic from Src IP 192.168.2.111”). Rule Details, Action Accept: Layer 3 traffic matching the rule details are forwarded. Deny: Layer 3 traffic matching the rule details are dropped at the device. Rule Details, Interface WLAN: When this option is selected, firewall rules are applied to traffic incoming on the device radio interface (WLAN). Depending on the setting of the Action parameter, traffic matching the rule details will either be forwarded to the LAN (Ethernet) interface or dropped at the device. LAN: When this option is selected, firewall rules are applied to traffic incoming on the device Ethernet interface (LAN). Depending on the setting of the Action parameter, traffic matching the rule details will be either forwarded to the WAN (radio) interface or dropped at the device. Rule Details, Log On: When a firewall rule is matched, a resulting system log message is generated. Off: When a firewall rule is matched, no system log messaging is generated. Rule Details, Protocol TCP: Only TCP packets will be matched by the configured rule UDP: Only UDP packets will be matched by the configured rule TCP+UDP: Only TCP and UDP packets will be matched by the configured rule ICMP: Only ICMP packets will be matched by the configured rule IP: All IP packets will be matched by the configured rule Rule Details, Port Rule matching is based on the port value in the incoming packet. Rule Details, Src IP Rule matching is based on the Source IP address of the incoming packet. Rule Details, Src Mask A subnet mask may be included to define a range of IP addresses to match. For example, if Src IP is configured to 192.168.2.0 and Src Mask is configured to 255.255.255.0, the rule matches all IP addresses from subnetwork 192.168.2.X. Rule Details, Dest IP Rule matching is based on the Destination IP address of the incoming packet. Rule Details, Dest Mask A subnet mask may be included to define a range of IP addresses to match. For example, if Dest IP is configured to 192.168.2.0 and Dest Mask is configured to 255.255.255.0, the rule matches all IP addresses from subnetwork 192.168.2.X. Rule Details, DSCP Rule matching is based on the DiffServ CodePoint value of the incoming packet Rule Details, TOS Rule matching is based on the Type Of Service value of the incoming packet. 164
CAMBIUM NETWORKS STA MONITOR MENU Use the Monitor menu to access device and network statistics and status information. This section may be used to analyze and troubleshoot network performance and operation. The Monitor menu contains the following pages: • STA Performance page on page 166 • STA System Status page on page 169 • STA Wireless Status page on page 171 • STA Network Status page on page 174 • STA System Log page on page 176 165
CAMBIUM NETWORKS STA Performance page Use the Performance page to monitor system status and statistics to analyze and troubleshoot network performance and operation. Figure 44 STA Performance page 166
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Table 69 STA Performance page attributes Attribute Meaning Stats Reset Trigger Reset all statistics. Ethernet TX, Total TX Total count of bytes transferred from the STA’s Ethernet interface. Ethernet TX, Total TX packets Total count of packets transferred from the STA’s Ethernet interface. Ethernet TX, Total TX packet errors Total count of packets transmitted out of the STA’s Ethernet interface with errors due to collisions, CRC errors, or irregular packet size. Ethernet TX, Total TX packet drops Total count of packets dropped prior to sending out of the AP’s Ethernet interface due to Ethernet setup or filtering issues. Ethernet TX, TX – Multicast Packets Total count of multicast packets sent via the STA’s Ethernet interface. Ethernet TX, TX – Broadcast Packets Total count of broadcast packets sent via the STA’s Ethernet interface. Ethernet RX, Total RX Total count of bytes received by the STA’s Ethernet interface. Ethernet RX, Total RX packets Total count of packets received by the STA’s Ethernet interface. Ethernet RX, Total RX packet errors Total count of packets received by the STA’s Ethernet interface with errors due to collisions, CRC errors, or irregular packet size. Ethernet RX, Total RX packet drops Total count of packets dropped prior to sending out of the STA’s wireless interface due to Ethernet setup or filtering issues. Ethernet RX, RX – Multicast Packets Total count of multicast packets received via the STA’s Ethernet interface. Ethernet RX, RX – Broadcast Packets Total count of broadcast packets received via the STA’s Ethernet interface. Wireless Uplink, Total Kbit Counter Total count of packets transmitted out of the STA’s wireless interface in Kbits. Wireless Uplink, Total Packet Counter Total count of packets transmitted out of the STA’s wireless interface. Wireless Uplink, Error Drop Packet Counter Total count of packets dropped after transmitting out of the STA’s wireless interface due to RF errors (No acknowledgement and other RF related packet error). Wireless Uplink, Capacity Drop Packet Counter Total count of packets dropped after transmitting out of the STA’s wireless interface due to capacity issues (data buffer/queue overflow or other performance or internal packet errors). 167
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Attribute Meaning Wireless Uplink, MultiBroadcast Kbit Counter Total count of multicast and broadcast packets transmitted out of the STA’s wireless interface in Kbits. Wireless Uplink, Retransmission Packet Counter Total count of packets retransmitted after transmitting out of the STA’s Wireless interface due to RF errors (No acknowledgement and other RF related packet error). Wireless Downlink, Total Kbit Counter Total Kbits received via the STA’s wireless interface. Wireless Downlink, Total Packet Counter Total count of packets received via the STA’s wireless interface. Wireless Downlink, Error Drop Packet Counter Total count of packets dropped prior to sending out of the STA’s Ethernet interface due to RF errors (packet integrity error and other RF related packet error). Wireless Downlink, MultiBroadcast Kbit Counter Total count of multicast and broadcast packets received on the STA’s wireless interface in Kbits. Device Reboot Counter Count of the number of reboots on the device since it has been powered up. Session Dropped Counter Count of the number of times the STA deregistered with the AP since the first registration. DFS Detection Counter Count of the number of times the STA triggered a DFS event. 168
CAMBIUM NETWORKS STA System Status page Use the System Status page to reference key system information. Figure 45 STA System Status page Table 70 STA System Status page attributes Attribute Meaning Software Version Current operating version of software on the device. This listing is also present on the GUI footer bar (which contains a hyperlink to download new system software). Hardware Version Board hardware version information. Firmware Version U-Boot version information. Active SW Bank Version Current operating version of software on the device in the active partition. This must be the same as the Software Version field above when the device is under normal operation. Date and Time Current date and time, subject to time zone offsets introduced by the configuration of the device Time Zone parameter. This shows a factory-configured time until a valid NTP server is configured. System Uptime The total system uptime since the last device reset. Wireless MAC Address The hardware address of the device wireless interface. LAN MAC Address The hardware address of the device LAN (Ethernet) interface. 169
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Attribute Meaning DFS Status N/A: DFS operation is not required for the region configured in parameter Country Code Channel Availability Check: Prior to transmitting, the device must check the configured Frequency Carrier for radar pulses for 60 seconds). If no radar pulses are detected, the device transitions to state In-Service Monitoring In-Service Monitoring: Radio is transmitting and receiving normally while monitoring for radar pulses which require a channel move Radar Signal Detected: The receiver has detected a valid radar pulse and is carrying out detect-and-avoid mechanisms (moving to an alternate channel). In-Service Monitoring at Alternative Channel: The radio has detected a radar pulse and has moved operation to a frequency configured in DFS Alternative Frequency Carrier 1 or DFS Alternative Frequency Carrier 2 System Not In Service due to DFS: The radio has detected a radar pulse and has failed channel availability checks on all alternative frequencies. The non-occupancy time for the radio frequencies in which radar was detected is 30 minutes 170
CAMBIUM NETWORKS STA Wireless Status page Use the Wireless Status page to reference key information about the radio’s wireless interface. Figure 46 STA Wireless Status page Table 71 STA Wireless Status page attributes Attribute Meaning Connected AP SSID of the AP to which the STA is registered. Connected AP MAC address Wireless MAC address of the AP to which the STA is registered. Distance from AP The distance from the AP, determined by radio signal propagation delay. Operating Frequency The current frequency at which the STA is transmitting and receiving. Operating Channel Bandwidth The current channel size at which the STA is transmitting and receiving. DL RSSI The Received Signal Strength Indicator, which is a measurement of the power level being received by the STA’s antenna. DL SNR The Signal to Noise Ratio, which is an expression of the carrier signal quality with respect to signal noise. Transmitter Output Power The current power level at which the STA is transmitting. 171
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Attribute Meaning Uplink MCS Mode Modulation and Coding Scheme – indicates the modulation mode used for the radio uplink, based on radio conditions (MCS 1-7, 9-15). Downlink MCS Mode Modulation and Coding Scheme – indicates the modulation mode used for the radio downlink, based on radio conditions (MCS 1-7, 9-15). Power Control Mode from the AP Open Loop: In this mode, the STA will not receive any power change information in the Group Poll Frame. STA calculates the UL transmit power based on path loss calculations only. Closed Loop: In closed loop UL power control, station will get the AP actual transmit power of beacon frame and STA Target Received Power Level in the beacon. Based on these two values, STA will calculate the path loss. Based on path loss and TRL values it will calculate it’s transmit power such that the signal from STA arrives at AP at the configured target level. Path loss calculation will be updated by STA every time there is a change in values of AP actual TX power or TRL in the Beacon. Ethernet Interface (LAN) Up: The radio (LAN) interface is functioning properly. Down: The radio (LAN) interface has encountered an error and is not servicing traffic. Wireless Interface (WAN) Up: The radio (WAN) interface is functioning properly. Down: The radio (WAN) interface has encountered an error and is not servicing traffic. Current Country Code The current code the STA is operating under. Time elapsed since last completed scan Amount of time elapsed since the last scan was completed by the STA for available APs. Connection Status The current registration status of the STA. Available AP List The Available AP List may be referenced to view which APs are available for STA network entry, and also to view the status of the current AP to STA radio link. SSID The SSID of the visible AP. MAC The MAC address of the visible AP. Frequency Carrier The current operating frequency of the visible AP. Bandwidth The current operating channel bandwidth of the visible AP. SNR The current measured Signal-to-Noise Ratio of the STA to AP link. 172
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Attribute Meaning RSSI The current measured Received Signal Strength Indicator at the AP. Meets Network Entry Attempt Criteria Yes: The scanned AP meets the Network Entry criteria defined by the internal Network Algorithm. No: The scanned AP does not meet the Network Entry criteria defined by the internal Network Algorithm. Network Entry State The indication of the result of the STA’s network entry attempt: Successful: STA registration is successful Failed: Out of Range: The STA is out of the AP’s configured maximum range (Max Range parameter) Failed: Capacity limit reached at AP: The AP is no longer allowing STA network entry due to capacity reached Failed: No Allocation on AP: The STA to AP handshaking failed due to a misconfigured pre-shared key between the STA and AP Failed: SW Version Incompatibility: The version of software resident on the AP is older than the software version on the STA Failed: PTP Mode: ACL Policy: The AP is configured with PTP Access set to MAC Limited and the STA’s MAC address is not configured in the AP’s PTP MAC Address field Failed: Other: The AP does not have the required available memory to allow network entry Time since last NE attempt This timer indicates the last time that the STA attempted network entry to the AP. Security Mode This field indicates the security state of the AP to STA link. 173
CAMBIUM NETWORKS STA Network Status page Use the STA Network Status page to reference key information about the device network status. Figure 47 STA Network Status page Table 72 STA Network Status page attributes Attribute Meaning STA Network Mode Bridge: The STA will act as a switch, and packets are forwarded or filtered based on their MAC destination address. NAT: The STA will act as a router, and packets are forwarded or filtered based on their IP header (source or destination) which can be grouped into subnets for finer granularity. Device IP Address Mode The current IP Address mode of the device (Static or DHCP) Ethernet Interface (LAN) Up: The device Ethernet interface is functioning and passing data Down: The device Ethernet interface has encountered an error disallowing full operation. Reset the device to reinitiate the Ethernet interface. Device IP address (LAN) The currently configured Ethernet IP address, used for device management. IP Subnet Mask (LAN) The currently configured device IP subnet mask. 174
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Attribute Meaning Wireless Interface (WAN) Up: The device wireless interface is functioning and passing data Down: The device wireless interface has encountered an error disallowing full operation. Reset the device to reinitiate the wireless interface. Device IP address (WAN) The IP address for the wireless interface is displayed only when the STA is in NAT Mode. IP Subnet Mask (WAN) The subnet for the wireless interface is displayed only when the STA is in NAT Mode. Gateway IP Address The IP address of a computer on the current network that acts as a gateway. A gateway acts as an entrance and exit to packets from and to other networks. DNS Server IP Address The IP addresses of the primary and secondary (if configured) servers used for DNS resolution. LAN MTU The currently configured Maximum Transmission Unit for the AP’s Ethernet (LAN) interface. Larger MTU configurations can enable the network to operate with greater efficiency, but in the case of retransmissions due to packet errors, efficiency is reduced since large packets must be resent in the event of an error. 175
CAMBIUM NETWORKS STA System Log page Use the STA System Log page to view the device system log and to download the log file to the accessing PC/devlce. Figure 48 STA System Log page Table 73 STA System Log attributes Attribute Meaning Display System Log on Web Interface Enabled: The system log file is displayed on the management GUI Disabled: The system log file is hidden on the management GUI Download full syslog file Use this button to download the full system log file to a connected PC/device 176
CAMBIUM NETWORKS STA TOOLS MENU The STA Tools menu provides several options for upgrading device software, configuration backup/restore, analyzing RF spectrum, testing device throughput, and running ping and traceroute tests. • STA Software Upgrade page on page 178 • STA Factory Default page on page 180 • STA Spectrum Analyzer page on page 181 • STA Throughput Test page on page 184 • STA Ping page on page 185 • STA Traceroute page on page 186 177
CAMBIUM NETWORKS STA Software Upgrade page Use the STA Software Upgrade page to update the device radio software to take advantage of new software features and improvements. Caution Read the Release Notes associated with each software release. Figure 49 STA Software Upgrade page Table 74 STA Software Upgrade attributes Attribute Meaning Software Version The current operating software version. Firmware Version The current operating U-Boot version. SW Upgrade Option From URL: A webserver may be used to retrieve software upgrade packages (downloaded to the device via the webserver). For example, if a webserver is running at IP address 192.168.2.1 and the software upgrade packages are located in the home directory, an operator may select option From URL and configure the Software Upgrade Source Info field to http://192.168.2.1/<software_upgrade_package> From Local File: Click Browse to select the local file containing the software upgrade package Software Upgrade Local File Click Browse to select a local file (located on the device accessing the web management interface) for upgrading the device software. To upgrade the device software, follow this: Procedure: 1 Download the software upgrade packages from https://support.cambiumnetworks.com/files/epmp 178
CAMBIUM NETWORKS 2 Clear the cache of the accessing browser 3 On the device GUI, navigate to Tools => Software Upgrade 4 Select the SW Upgrade Option which represents the location of your software upgrade packages 5 Based on the configuration of SW Upgrade Option, enter either the Software Upgrade Source Info or click the Browse button and locate the software package 6 Click Upgrade 7 When the upgrade is completed successfully, click the Reset icon 179
CAMBIUM NETWORKS STA Factory Default page Use the STA Backup/Restore page to reset the device to its factory default configuration. Figure 50 STA Factory Default page Table 75 STA Software Upgrade attributes Attribute Meaning Reset to Factory Default Configuration Use this button to reset the device to its factory default configuration Caution A reset to factory default configuration resets all device parameters. The STA ceases to transmit and any registered STAs lose their session. 180
CAMBIUM NETWORKS STA Spectrum Analyzer page Use the STA Spectrum Analyzer page to configure STA spectrum analyzer parameters and to download the spectrum analyzer tool. To download the spectrum analyzer tool, the AP Device Mode must be set to Spectrum Analyzer. Java Runtime Environment is required to run the AP spectrum analyzer. Caution Conducting spectrum analysis causes the STA to enter scan mode and the STA drops all RF connections. Vary the days and times when you analyze the spectrum in an area. The RF environment can change throughout the day or throughout the week. To conduct a spectrum analysis, follow these steps: Required Software: • Java Run-time Environment (JRE) Procedure: 1 On the STA GUI, navigate to Configure => System 2 Configure Device mode to Spectrum Analyzer 3 Click the Save button 4 Click the Reset button 5 Login to the STA GUI, then navigate to Tools => Spectrum Analyzer 6 Click Download Spectrum Analyzer Tool 7 Locate the folder to which the spectrum analyzer tool was saved, and double-click on file csa.jnlp to launch the tool 8 If a security warning window is presented, tick the checkbox next to “I accept the risk and want to run this application” 181
CAMBIUM NETWORKS 9 In the security warning window, click Run The spectrum analyzer interface is displayed 10 Click Range to configure the range of frequencies to scan. 182
CAMBIUM NETWORKS 11 Click Start Scan to begin scanning When scanning is complete, follow these steps to return the device to AP operation: Procedure: 1 In the spectrum analyzer application, click Stop Scan 2 Close the spectrum analyzer application by clicking File => Exit 3 On the STA GUI, navigate to Configure => System 4 Configure Device Mode to STA 5 Click the Save button 6 Click the Reset button Display of the average, peak, current, and minimum power levels for the configured range Statistical display of the number of times each frequency in the range was scanned Spectrogram display of the energy levels detected throughout the configured range, over time 183
CAMBIUM NETWORKS STA Throughput Test page Use the STA Throughput Test page to conduct a simple test of STA wireless throughput to the AP to which it is registered. This allows you to determine the throughput that can be expected on a particular link without having to use external tools. Figure 51 STA Throughput Test page Table 76 STA Throughput Test attributes Attribute Meaning Wireless MAC Address of Connected AP This is not an editable field. It is automatically populated with the wireless MAC address of the AP to which the STA is registered. Packet Size Choose the Packet Size to use for the throughput test. Time Duration Choose the Time Duration in seconds to use for the throughput test. DL Throughput This field indicates the result of the throughput test on the downlink, in Mbps. UL Throughput This field indicates the result of the throughput test on the uplink, in Mbps. 184
CAMBIUM NETWORKS STA Ping page Use the STA Ping page to conduct a simple test of STA IP connectivity to other devices which are reachable from the network. If no ping response is received or if “Destination Host Unreachable” is reported, the target may be down, there may be no route back to the STA, or there may be a failure in the network hardware (i.e. DNS server failure). Figure 52 STA Ping page Table 77 STA Ping attributes Attribute Meaning IP Address Enter the IP address of the ping target Number of packets (-c) Enter the total number of ping requests to send to the target Buffer size (-s) Enter the number of data bytes to be sent TTL (-t) Set the IP Time-To-Live (TTL) for multicast packets. This flag applies if the ping target is a multicast address 185
CAMBIUM NETWORKS STA Traceroute page Use the STA Traceroute page to display the route (path) and associated diagnostics for IP connectivity between the STA and the destination specified. Figure 53 STA Traceroute page Table 78 STA Traceroute attributes Attribute Meaning IP Address Enter the IP address of the target of the traceroute diagnostic Fragmentation (-F) ON: Allow source and target to fragment probe packets OFF: Do not fragment probe packets (on source or target) Trace method (-l) ICMP ECHO: Use ICMP ECHO for traceroute probes UDP: Use UDP for traceroute probes Display TTL (-l) ON: Display TTL values for each hop on the route OFF: Suppress display of TTL values for each hop on the route Verbose (-v) ON: ICMP packets other than TIME_EXCEEDED and UNREACHABLE are displayed in the output OFF: Suppress display of extraneous ICMP messaging 186
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Radius Server INSTALLING FREE-RADIUS ON UBUNTU 12.04 LTS To install the Radius server on Ubuntu 12.04 LTS, follow these instructions: 1. On the free-radius web page http://freeradius.org, download the latest package (currently 3.0.0), either from the main page or the download page. 2. Extract the archive file by using the command line as shown below: • To extract a tar.bz2 file, use the command (note the j option) tar -jxvf freeradius-server-x.x.x.tar.bz2 • To extract a tar.gz file, use the command (note the z option) tar -zxvf freeradius-server-x.x.x.tar.gz 3. Once the files are extracted to a folder (cd freeradius-server-x.x.x), execute these commands: sudo apt-get install libssl-dev sudo apt-get install libtalloc-dev ./configure make make install CONFIGURING FREE-RADIUS SERVER Note IP address or subnet of the client must be configured in the clients.conf file. Ex. – For the examples listed in the document, the subnet of the external machine is 172.22.121.0 or 192.168.0.0. To configure Free-Radius server, follow these steps: 1. For testing from external machines, edit /usr/local/etc/raddb/clients.conf and add an entry. For example: client 172.22.121.0/24 { ipaddr = 172.22.121.0 netmask = 24 secret = cambium proto = * shortname = epmp1 } client 127.0.0.0/24 { ipaddr = 172.22.121.0 netmask = 24 secret = cambium proto = * shortname = epmp1 } client 192.168.0.0/16 { ipaddr = 192.168.0.0 187
CAMBIUM NETWORKS netmask = 16 secret = cambium proto = * } 2. To add EAP-TTLS Username and EAP-TTLS Password, edit usr/local/etc/raddb/user. For example put this string at the end of file: cambium-station Cleartext-Password := "cambium", where cambium-station - EAP-TTLS Username and “cambium” - EAP-TTLS Password. 3. To configure free-radius key and certificate, edit /usr/local/etc/raddb/mods-available/eap and add your certificates to folder /usr/local/etc/raddb/certs. Locate a string such as default_eap_type, private_key_file, certificate_file in eap file and change the value to: default_eap_type = ttls private_key_password = *** - according to your certificate private_key_file = ${certdir}/***.key certificate_file = ${certdir}/***.crt Under the ttls section, change the following: copy_request_to_tunnel=yes use_tunnel_reply=yes Note Once these steps are performed, free-radius in debug mode can be initiated: $ radiusd –X. 188
CAMBIUM NETWORKS CONFIGURING RADIUS PARAMETERS ON AP Figure 54 AP Radius configuration To configure Radius parameters on AP, follow these steps: 1. Open the GUI and login as admin. 2. Navigate to Configure -> Security -> Authentication. 3. Change Authentication Type value to EAP-TTLS. 4. Add IP Address of your RADIUS Server in the Radius Servers table. 5. Also configure Port (you may use default 1812) and Secret which has to be the same as in clients.conf file. 6. Click Save, to keep the changes. 189
CAMBIUM NETWORKS CONFIGURING RADIUS PARAMETERS ON STA Figure 55 STA Radius configuration To configure Radius parameters on STA, follow these steps: 1. Select EAP-TTLS Authentication Type. 2. Configure EAP-TTLS Username and EAP-TTLS Password, as configured in file users. 3. Add Certificates to the Certificates table. 4. Click Save, to keep the changes. 190
CAMBIUM NETWORKS CONFIGURING MIR PROFILES To configure the MIR profiles, follow these steps: • Create a dictionary file with the MIR Profiles: # touch dictionary.cambium • Edit dictionary.cambium according to the instructions that you can find under /usr/local/etc/raddb directory in file dictionary. For example: ATTRIBUTE Cambium-Canopy-ULMB 110 integer #Max Burst Uplink Rate ATTRIBUTE Cambium-Canopy-DLMB 110 integer #Max Burst Downlink Rate VENDOR Cambium 17713 # # Cambium vendor-specific attributes. # BEGIN-VENDOR Cambium ATTRIBUTE Cambium-Canopy-VLIGVID 21 integer #VLAN Ingress VLAN ID ATTRIBUTE Cambium-Canopy-VLMGVID 22 integer #VLAN Management VLAN ID ATTRIBUTE Cambium-Canopy-ULMB 26 integer #Max Burst Uplink Rate ATTRIBUTE Cambium-Canopy-DLMB 27 integer #Max Burst Downlink Rate • Create link on your dictionary: #ln -s dictionary.cambium dictionary.local • To configure MIR profiles, edit usr/local/etc/raddb/users and add profiles for each client below users configuration : station33 Cleartext-Password := "cambium33" Cambium-Canopy-ULMB = 100, Cambium-Canopy-DLMB = 100 station34 Cleartext-Password := "cambium34" Cambium-Canopy-ULMB = 110, Cambium-Canopy-DLMB = 110 station35 Cleartext-Password := "cambium35" Cambium-Canopy-ULMB = 120, Cambium-Canopy-DLMB = 120 191
CAMBIUM NETWORKS A few example scenarios of MIR and RADIUS configurations are described in Table 79. Table 79 Example scenarios of MIR and RADIUS configurations Scenario Description No MIR control via Radius In a scenario where Radius is not in use for MIR profiles, the GUI will be the only place to configure MIR profiles and apply them to the corresponding STAs. Configure the MIR profiles in the Configure =-> Quality of Service menu option on the AP GUI and apply the corresponding profile # in the STA under the same menu option on STA. MIR control using only Radius In the case where only the Radius server is being used for MIR profiles, all settings in the GUI will be overridden for any STA being managed by the Radius Server. In this case, create the MIR profile with Station usernames and password on the Radius server. At the time of registration, the AP will use the radius information and apply the corresponding profile to the STA. In the wireless statistics page ( => Wireless Status), the MIR profile # from the Radius server along with UL and DL rate information will show up. In this scenario the QOS profiles in the AP GUI are irrelevant. Multiple STAs across multiple APs can then be managed via Radius. Hybrid control using both Radius and MIR profile on the AP GUI The system will also support a hybrid mode where Radius and the GUI QOS profiles can be used simultaneously as long as the same STA does not have a profile # associated from the AP & Radius. In case where it is redundant, Radius server setting will override the MIR profile settings from the GUI. CREATING CERTIFICATE FOR RADIUS SERVER AND STA DEVICE Create your own certification center Creating a CA private key 1. Create a root (self-signed) certificate from our private certificate. Go to the directory where the database is stored for our certificates and start generating. 2. Create a private key CA (my own Certificate Authority). RSA key length of 2048 bits encryption algorithm 3DES. File name with a key - cambium-ca.key openssl genrsa-des3-out cambium-ca.key 2048 Generating RSA private key, 2048 bit long modulus ...................... + + + ........... + + + e is 65537 (0x10001) Enter pass phrase for cambium.key: Verifying - Enter pass phrase for cambium-ca.key: 3. While creating the private key, you must enter a passphrase, which will be closed by key (and confirm it). Content key, can viewed from the following command: openssl rsa-noout-text-in cambium-ca.key In this case you must enter the private key again. Creating a CA certificate Generate a self-signed certificate CA: 192
CAMBIUM NETWORKS openssl req-new-x509-days 3650 -key cambium-ca.key-out cambium-ca.crt Enter pass phrase for cambium.key: You are asked to enter information that will be incorporated into your certificate request. What you enter is called a Distinguished Name or a DN. There are quite a few fields of which you can leave some blank. For some fields there is a default value, If you enter '.', field is left blank. ----- Country Name (2 letter country code) State or Province Name (full name) Locality Name (Ex. City) Organization Name (Ex, Cambium Networks) Organizational Unit Name (Ex. Cambium) Common Name (Ex. cambium root CA) Email Address (Ex. admin@cambium.com) Generating the certificate, you must enter a passphrase, with a closed key CA, and then - to fill in the required fields (company name, email, etc.); the most important of these is the Common Name - the unique name of the certification center. In this case, as the Common name was chosen "cambium root CA", view the resulting certificate command as shown below: openssl x509-noout-text-in cambium-ca.crt As a result, we see: Certificate: Data: Version: 3 (0x2) Serial Number: ea: 30:7 b: 69 : a2: 13:0 c: 70 Signature Algorithm: md5WithRSAEncryption Issuer: C = UA, ST = Euro, L = Kiev, O = Cambium Networks, OU = Cambium, CN = cambium root CA / email address = admin@cambium.com # Issued to (by us, that is self-signed) Validity Not Before: Dec 9, 2005 11:34:29 GMT Not After: Dec 7, 2015 11:34:29 GMT # Validity of the certificate Subject: C = UA, ST = Euro, L = Kiev, O = Cambium Networks, OU = Cambium, CN = cambium root CA / email address = admin@cambium.com # Filter (field) certificate Subject Public Key Info: Public Key Algorithm: rsaEncryption RSA Public Key: (2048 bit) Modulus (2048 bit): 00: c0: ff: 50 : fd: a8: eb: 07:9 b: 17 : d1: a9: e2: a5: dc: 59: a7: 97:28:9 f: bc: a4: 01:16:45:37: f5: 8d: ca: 1e: 12: ca: 25:02:8 a: cf: ee: ae: 35:59: ed: 57:89: c7: 2b: 17:9 f: 8b: de: 60 : db: e5: eb: b3: de: 09:30:3 b: a9: 68: 40: f7: f8: 84 : f4: 6c: b2: 24:3 d: ed: 45 : a3: 8a: 66:99: 40: a9: 53:0 c: 75 : e3: df: f3: ef: 20:0 c: a6: 3f: f2: dd: e9: 1c: f5: d1: c1: 32:4 c: 44 : fd: c1: a2: d9: e6: e0: dc: 04:0 c: f8: dd: 9e: 31 : aa: 9d: 60 : b0: 84 : d2: e0: b7: a5: 193
CAMBIUM NETWORKS eb: 82:31:4 f: 71 : c4: ee: ab: 5c: 8e: ef: 8c: a1: 1a: 2a: 62: e9: e9: 36 : ff: 12 : b9: c9: ac: 0e: 4d: ac: 08:97:87: d2: 30:2 f: 41 : a1: 9e: ef: 8b: bf: c6: cf: 66:70:02: ab: 2d: b0: 9c: 56 : b8: 13 : e8: 92:59: f5: d9: 33 : d7: 33:6 a: 7c: cb: 9b: 92 : ee: 4b: 22:32:73:59:70:3 f: b1: f6: 1b: 67:1 d: 28 : eb: bb: 4b: 5e: 61:95:43:78: d5: 3b: db: e1: 37 : f1: ec: 0d: db: 50:65:22: cb: f4: f9: b8: 2a: c6: 1f: 2b: e9: f8: 64:03:4 f: 36 : dc: 72:8 e: be: 3d: 12:8 a: ca: 8b: 95 Exponent: 65537 (0x10001) X509v3 extensions: X509v3 Subject Key Identifier: 4C: 80 : F5: 82:4 C: A4: 52 : DF: 9E: 0C: 0D: 64:74:68:1 E: 45 : F6: C1: C7: 68 X509v3 Authority Key Identifier: keyid: 4C: 80 : F5: 82:4 C: A4: 52 : DF: 9E: 0C: 0D: 64:74:68:1 E: 45 : F6: C1: C7: 68 DirName :/ C = UA / ST = Euro / L = Kiev / O = Cambium Networks / OU = Cambium / CN = cambium root CA / emailAddress = admin@cambium.com serial: EA: 30:7 B: 69 : A2: 13:0 C: 70 X509v3 Basic Constraints: CA: TUAE Signature Algorithm: md5WithRSAEncryption 57 : db: 0d: 2b: 27 : eb: 0a: 97:7 f: b1: 37 : b3: d1: d7: 14 : a6: 80:66: 3d: 7c: 00:4 a: 45:1 f: 7c: 2b: 5e: 30 : b2: 72:74:9 f: 6d: 33:82: f7: f7: de: 54 : a9: 2b: e7: ea: 1b: 93 : bd: cc: 74:4 f: 11 : ed: 94:0 b: b9: b2: 1f: b1: 86:6 e: c6: 48:71:48:9 b: 2b: 0a: 36 : f3: ab: d6: f9: 75 : c9: 0d: 1b: e9: 2c: 85:04: fc: 17:9 a: 94 : b9: 14:0 d: 15 : d1: 1e: 8b: bb: 9e: 91 : ca: 40:8 c: d8: ef: dd: 4a: 75 : d0: b9: 62 : d4: ee: 1b: e5: b5: 7e: fa: f1: 5d: 62 : d1: 78 : b0: 34:04: bb: 60:37:8 a: a8: 74:88: f6: 94:3 b: c8: fb: c0: 98 : f4: 94 : e9: d5: 53:8 e: 31 : e6: 25:56: c3: 84:7 c: 46 : b9: 09:5 f: e3: 43 : a8: 57 : c9: 3a: d9: 3d: a7: b0: 41 : db: ea: ca: 60:28:0 b: a3: f0: 0b: e6: d6: c0: 5b: 15:0 c: f8: 19:36:26: d3: 2a: 8d: c9: 67 : fe: 04:6 f: e9: bf: f9: 55 : de: 2c: 92:04:81:6 f: 43 : d5: 94:25: af: 83 : b8: 01:22: c8: 1a: 7e: 2e: a9: 10 : b0: e5: 35 : a7: 17 : bf: 65 : a1: 31:55:85: ba: 10:24:71:03:3 b: d6: 71 : a4: ad: 48:28:46:8 f: 7e: e6: b3: 8c: 37:97:4 f: 36:05:8 c: f6: d1: 40 : a8: c4: 58:9 b: 28 Now copy the certificate and key of the CA in a public place, for example, in /etc/ssl/cambium: mkdir /etc /ssl /cambium cp cambium-ca. * /etc/ssl/cambium/ Issuance of certificates Script certificate generation Download (from the Cambium support web-site) the script sign_cert.sh. It allows you to create server/user. Edit the following lines in it: ROOTCA = "cambium" root CA name - Filename of the root certificate (without the suffix '-ca') O = "Cambium Networks" - Name of the organization C = "UA" - country 194
CAMBIUM NETWORKS ST = "Euro" - staff L = "Kiev" - city OU = "Cambium" - unit EMAIL = email@cambium.com - email BITS = 2048 - Size of the generated key in bits CLIENT_DAYS = 730 - Client certificate validity period in days SERVER_DAYS = 1461 - Server certificate validity period in days Lines related to the country, city, department, email, etc must be fixed (though not necessarily, this is default values that can be changed in the process of creating the certificate). Variables related to the terms of validity of the certificate can be left without changes. Creating a server certificate (for RADIUS) Create a server certificate (option cerver_cert), file name (and certificate) radius.cambium.com. . / sign_cert.sh server_cert radius.cambium.com create certificate key: radius.cambium.com.key Generating RSA private key, 2048 bit long modulus ....... + + + .................................. + + + e is 65537 (0x10001) # First generates key, it is necessary enter the password which will close the key Enter pass phrase for radius.cambium.com.key: Verifying - Enter pass phrase for radius.cambium.com.key: decrypt certificate key: radius.cambium.com.crt Enter pass phrase for radius.cambium.com.key: writing RSA key # Create a certificate request Create certificate request: radius.cambium.com.csr . / sign_cert.sh radius.cambium.com server_cert You are about to be asked to enter information that will be incorporated into your certificate request. What you are about to enter is what is called a Distinguished Name or a DN. There are quite a few fields but you can leave some blank For some fields there will be a default value, If you enter '.', the field will be left blank. Then you must specify the fields you want, like for the root certificate. Default values have already crammed in square brackets. To use them simply click ENTER. 1. Your Country Name (2 letter country code): 2. State or Province Name (full name): 3. Locality Name (Ex.- city) 4. Organization Name (Ex.- Cambium Networks): 5. Organizational Unit Name (Ex.- Cambium): 6. Common Name (Ex.- radius.cambium.com): 7. Email Address (Ex.- email@cambium.com): # Sign the certificate request sign certificate by CA: radius.cambium.com.crt 195
CAMBIUM NETWORKS sign ca is: cambium-ca CA signing: radius.cambium.com.csr -> radius.cambium.com.crt: Using configuration from ca.config Since we sign new created certificate with root certificate, we must enter the password which we used to close root certificate of our center CA Enter pass phrase for. /.. / cambium-ca.key: Check that the request matches the signature Signature ok The Subject's Distinguished Name is as follows countryName: PRINTABLE: 'UA' stateOrProvinceName: PRINTABLE: 'Euro' localityName: PRINTABLE: 'Kiev' organizationName: PRINTABLE: 'Cambium Networks' organizationalUnitName: PRINTABLE: 'Cambium' commonName: T61STRING: 'radius.cambium.com' emailAddress: IA5STRING: 'email@cambium.com' Certificate is to be certified until Dec 25 12:05:18 2013 GMT (730 days) Everything is OK, completing work Server certificate is created. 196
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Operation and Troubleshooting This chapter provides instructions for operators of ePMP networks. The following topics are described in this chapter: • General Planning for Troubleshooting on page 198 • Upgrading device software on page 200 • Testing hardware on page 201 • Troubleshooting the radio link on page 204 • Using the device external reset button on page 206 • Resetting the AP or STA to factory defaults by power cycling on page 207 197
CAMBIUM NETWORKS General Planning for Troubleshooting Effective troubleshooting depends in part on measures that you take before you experience trouble in your network. Cambium recommends the following measures for each site: Procedure: 1 Identify troubleshooting tools that are available at your site (such as a protocol analyzer). 2 Identify commands and other sources that can capture baseline data for the site. These may include: • Ping • tracert or traceroute • Throughput Test results • Throughput data • Configure GUI page captures • Monitor GUI page captures • Session logs 3 Start a log for the site, including: • Operating procedures • Site-specific configuration records • Network topology • Software releases • Types of hardware deployed • Site-specific troubleshooting process • Escalation procedures • GPS latitude/longitude of each network element GENERAL FAULT ISOLATION PROCESS Effective troubleshooting also requires an effective fault isolation methodology that includes • attempting to isolate the problem to the level of a system, subsystem, or link, such as o AP to STA o AP to CMM o AP to GPS o CMM to GPS o power • researching System Logs of the involved equipment. • answering the questions listed in the following section. • reversing the last previous corrective attempt before proceeding to the next. • performing only one corrective attempt at a time. 198
CAMBIUM NETWORKS QUESTIONS TO HELP ISOLATE THE PROBLEM When a problem occurs, attempt to answer the following questions: 1 What is the history of the problem? • Have we changed something recently? • Have we seen other symptoms before this? 2 How wide-spread is the symptom? • Is the problem on only a single STA? (If so, focus on that STA.) • Is the problem on multiple STAs? If so o is the problem on one AP in the cluster? (If so, focus on that AP) o is the problem on multiple, but not all, APs in the cluster? (If so, focus on those APs) o is the problem on all APs in the cluster? (If so, focus on the CMM and the GPS signal.) 3 Based on data in the System Log • is intermittent connectivity indicated? (If so, verify your configuration, power level, CINR, cables and connections, and the speed duplex of both ends of the link). • does the problem correlate to loss-of-sync events? 4 Are connections made via shielded cables? 5 Does the GPS antenna have an unobstructed view of the entire horizon? 199
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Upgrading device software To take advantage of new features and software improvements for the ePMP system, monitor the Cambium Networks PMP Software website: https://support.cambiumnetworks.com/files/epmp To upgrade the device software (AP or STA), follow this: Procedure: 1 When upgrading multiple v1.0.3 integrated devices, ensure that the browser cache is cleared at the beginning of the upgrade process. 2 Log in to the device GUI via the management IP 3 Navigate to page Tools, Software Upgrade 4 Set SW Upgrade Option to From URL to pull the software file from a network software server, or select From Local File to upload a file from the accessing device. 5 If From URL is selected, enter the server IP address, server port, and file path. If From Local File is selected, click Browse to launch the file selection dialogue 6 Click Upgrade Caution Do not power off the unit in the middle of an upgrade process. 7 Once the software upgrade is complete, click the Reset icon. 200
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Testing hardware This section describes how to test the hardware when it fails on startup or during operation. Before testing hardware, confirm that all outdoor cables, that is those that connect the AP or STA to equipment inside the building, are of the supported type, as defined in Ethernet cabling on page 57 CHECKING THE POWER SUPPLY LED When the power supply is connected to the main power supply, the expected LED behavior is: • The Power (green) LED illuminates steadily. If the expected LED operation does not occur, or if a fault is suspected in the hardware, check the LED states and choose the correct test procedure: • Power LED is off on page 201 • Ethernet LED is off on page 201 POWER LED IS OFF Meaning: Either the power supply is not receiving power from the AC/DC outlet, or there is a wiring fault in the unit. Action: Remove the AP/STA cable from the PSU and observe the effect on the Power LED. If the Power LED does not illuminate, confirm that the mains power supply is working, for example, check the plug. If the power supply is working, report a suspected power supply fault to Cambium Networks. ETHERNET LED IS OFF Meaning: There is no Ethernet traffic between the AP/STA and power supply. Action: The fault may be in the LAN or AP/STA cable: • Remove the LAN cable from the power supply, examine it and confirm it is not faulty. • If the PC connection is working, remove the AP/STA cable from the power supply, examine it, and check that the wiring to pins 1&2 and 3&6 is correct and not crossed. 201
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Test Ethernet packet errors reported by AP/STA Log into the AP or STA and click Monitor, Performance. Click Reset System Counters at the bottom of the page and wait until LAN RX – Total Packet Counter has reached 1 million. If the counter does not increment or increments too slowly, because for example the ePMP system is newly installed and there is no offered Ethernet traffic, then abandon this procedure and consider using the procedure Test ping packet loss on page 202. Check the LAN RX – Error Packet Counter statistic. The test has passed if this is less than 10. Test Ethernet packet errors reported by managed switch or router If the AP/STA is connected to a managed Ethernet switch or router, it may be possible to monitor the error rate of Ethernet packets. Please refer to the user guide of the managed network equipment. The test has passed if the rate of packet errors reported by the managed Ethernet switch or router is less than 10 in 1 million packets. Test ping packet loss Using a computer, it is possible to generate and monitor packets lost between the power supply and the AP/STA. This can be achieved by executing the Command Prompt application which is supplied as standard with Windows and Mac operating systems. Caution This procedure disrupts network traffic carried by the AP or STA under test: Procedure: 1 Ensure that the IP address of the computer is configured appropriately for connection to the AP or STA under test, and does not conflict with other devices connected to the network. 2 If the power supply is connected to an Ethernet switch or router then connect the computer to a spare port, if available. 3 If it is not possible to connect the computer to a spare port of an Ethernet switch or router, then the power supply will need to be disconnected from the network in order to execute this test: • Disconnect the power supply from the network. • Connect the computer directly to the LAN port of the power supply. 4 On the computer, open the Command Prompt application. 5 Send 1000 ping packets of length 1500 bytes. The process will take 1000 seconds, which is approximately 17 minutes. If the computer is running a Windows operating system, this is achieved by typing (for an IPv6 address, use the ping6 command): ping –n 1000 –l 1500 <ipaddress> where <ipaddress> is the IP address of the AP or STA under test. If the computer is running a MAC operating system, this is achieved by typing: ping –c 1000 –s 1492 <ipaddress> 202
CAMBIUM NETWORKS where <ipaddress> is the IP address of the AP/STA under test. 6 Record how many Ping packets have been lost. This is reported by Command Prompt on completion of the test. The test has passed if the number of lost packets is less than 2. 203
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Troubleshooting the radio link This section describes how to test the link when there is no radio communication, when it is unreliable, or when the data throughput rate is too low. It may be necessary to test both the AP and the STA. MODULE HAS LOST OR DOES NOT ESTABLISH RADIO CONNECTIVITY If there is no wireless activity, follow this: Procedure: 1 Check that the AP and STAs are configured with the same Frequency Carrier. Also, if operating in a region where DFS is required, ensure that the STA’s Frequency Carrier List contains the frequencies configured in the AP’s DFS Alternate Frequency Carrier 1 and DFS Alternate Frequency Carrier 2 fields. 2 Check that the Channel Bandwidth is configured the same at the AP and at the STA 3 On the AP, verify that the Max Range setting is configured to a distance slightly greater than the distance between the AP and the furthest STA that must register to the AP. 4 Check that the AP’s Synchronization Source is configured properly based on the network configuration. 5 Verify the authentication settings on the AP and STA. if Authentication Type is set to WPA2, verify that the Pre-shared Key matches between the AP and the STA Preferred AP List 6 Check that the software at each end of the link is the same version. 7 Check that the desired AP’s SSID is configured in the STA Preferred AP List. 8 On the STA, check the DL RSSI and DL CINR values. Verify that for the STA installed distance, that the values are consistent with Table 80 5 GHz threshold, power and link loss on page 260 and Table 81 2.4 GHz threshold, power and link loss on page 260. 9 Check Tx Power on the AP and STA 10 Check that the link is not obstructed or the AP/STA misaligned. 11 Check the DFS status page (Monitor, System Status) at each end of the link and establish that there is a quiet wireless channel to use. 12 If there are no faults found in the configuration and there is absolutely no wireless signal, retry the installation procedure. 13 If this does not work then report a suspected AP/STA fault to Cambium Networks. 204
CAMBIUM NETWORKS LINK IS UNRELIABLE OR DOES NOT ACHIEVE DATA RATES REQUIRED If there is some activity but the link is unreliable or does not achieve the data rates required, proceed as follows: Procedure: 1 Check that the interference has not increased by monitoring the uplink and downlink CINR values reported in the AP page Monitor, Wireless Status 2 Check that the RSSI values reported at the AP an STA are proper based on the distance of the link – see Table 80 5 GHz threshold, power and link loss on page 260 and Table 81 2.4 GHz threshold, power and link loss on page 260. 3 Check that the path loss is low enough for the communication rates required. 4 Check that the AP or STA has not become misaligned. 5 Review your Quality of Service configuration and ensure that traffic is properly classified and prioritized. MODULE HAS LOST OR DOES NOT GAIN GPS SYNCHRONIZATION To troubleshoot a loss of sync, perform the following steps. Procedure: 1 If the AP is receiving synchronization via CMM, verify that the CMM is properly receiving sync via its attached GPS antenna (see PMP Synchronization Solutions User Guide). Verify that the cables from the CMM to the network switch are at most 30 ft (shielded) or 10 ft (unshielded) and that the network switch is not PoE (802.3af) capable. 2 If the CMM is receiving GPS synchronization pulses, verify that the AP’s Synchronization Source is set to CMM and that the AP’s GPS status bar icon is lit green. 3 If the AP is receiving synchronization via its internal GPS module and an external GPS antenna, verify the cabling from the AP to the GPS antenna, and verify that the AP’s Synchronization Source is set to GPS. 205
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Using the device external reset button ePMP APs and STAs feature an external button which serves two purposes: • To reset the device (briefly depress the button for more than two seconds but less than ten seconds then release) Caution If the reset button is pressed for more than ten seconds while powered on, the device will reset back to its factory default configuration • To reset the device to its factory default configuration (depress the button for more than ten seconds then release) Integrated Radio Reset Button Connectorized Radio Reset Button Un-synced Connectorized Radio Reset Button 206
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Resetting the AP or STA to factory defaults by power cycling Operators may reset an AP or STA to default factory configuration by a sequence of power cycling (removing power to the device. This procedure allows operators to perform a factory default reset without a tower climb or additional tools. Procedure: 1 Remove the AP or STA’s Ethernet cable from the power supply, then reconnect the Ethernet cable to re-supply power to the AP or STA device (1st power cycle) 2 Remove the AP or STA’s Ethernet cable from the power supply, then reconnect the Ethernet cable to re-supply power to the AP or STA device (2nd power cycle) 3 Remove the AP or STA’s Ethernet cable from the power supply, then reconnect the Ethernet cable to re-supply power to the AP or STA device (3rd power cycle) 4 Remove the AP or STA’s Ethernet cable from the power supply, then reconnect the Ethernet cable to re-supply power to the AP or STA device (4th power cycle) 5 Remove the AP or STA’s Ethernet cable from the power supply, then reconnect the Ethernet cable to re-supply power to the AP or STA device (5th power cycle) to bring it all the way up. The AP or STA will now come up with the factory default settings. Note Steps 1 through 4 above will have to be done within 10 seconds to reset the radio to its factory default settings. This is to reduce the risk of the radio resetting to factory default settings during normal, repeated power outages. 207
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Legal and reference information This chapter provides legal notices including software license agreements. Caution Intentional or unintentional changes or modifications to the equipment must not be made unless under the express consent of the party responsible for compliance. Any such modifications could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment and will void the manufacturer’s warranty. The following topics are described in this chapter: • Cambium Networks end user license agreement on page 209 • Hardware warranty on page 258 • Limit of liability on page 259 • Compliance with safety standards on page 261 lists the safety specifications against which the ePMP has been tested and certified. It also describes how to keep RF exposure within safe limits. • Compliance with radio regulations on page 264 describes how the ePMP complies with the radio regulations that are enforced in various countries. • Notifications on page 278 contain notes made to regulatory bodies for the ePMP. • Data throughput tables on page 287 contain tables and graphs to support calculation of the data rate capacity that can be provided by ePMP configurations. 208
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Cambium Networks end user license agreement ACCEPTANCE OF THIS AGREEMENT In connection with Cambium Networks’ delivery of certain proprietary software or products containing embedded or pre-loaded proprietary software, or both, Cambium Networks is willing to license this certain proprietary software and the accompanying documentation to you only on the condition that you accept all the terms in this End User License Agreement (“Agreement”). IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT, DO NOT USE THE PRODUCT OR INSTALL THE SOFTWARE. INSTEAD, YOU MAY, FOR A FULL REFUND, RETURN THIS PRODUCT TO THE LOCATION WHERE YOU ACQUIRED IT OR PROVIDE WRITTEN VERIFICATION OF DELETION OF ALL COPIES OF THE SOFTWARE. ANY USE OF THE SOFTWARE, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO USE ON THE PRODUCT, WILL CONSTITUTE YOUR ACCEPTANCE TO THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT. DEFINITIONS In this Agreement, the word “Software” refers to the set of instructions for computers, in executable form and in any media, (which may include diskette, CD-ROM, downloadable internet, hardware, or firmware) licensed to you. The word “Documentation” refers to electronic or printed manuals and accompanying instructional aids licensed to you. The word “Product” refers to Cambium Networks’ fixed wireless broadband devices for which the Software and Documentation is licensed for use. GRANT OF LICENSE Cambium Networks Limited (“Cambium”) grants you (“Licensee” or “you”) a personal, nonexclusive, non-transferable license to use the Software and Documentation subject to the Conditions of Use set forth in “Conditions of use” and the terms and conditions of this Agreement. Any terms or conditions relating to the Software and Documentation appearing on the face or reverse side of any purchase order, purchase order acknowledgment or other order document that are different from, or in addition to, the terms of this Agreement will not be binding on the parties, even if payment is accepted. CONDITIONS OF USE Any use of the Software and Documentation outside of the conditions set forth in this Agreement is strictly prohibited and will be deemed a breach of this Agreement. 1. Only you, your employees or agents may use the Software and Documentation. You will take all necessary steps to insure that your employees and agents abide by the terms of this Agreement. 2. You will use the Software and Documentation (i) only for your internal business purposes; (ii) only as described in the Software and Documentation; and (iii) in strict accordance with this Agreement. 3. You may use the Software and Documentation, provided that the use is in conformance with the terms set forth in this Agreement. 209
CAMBIUM NETWORKS 4. Portions of the Software and Documentation are protected by United States copyright laws, international treaty provisions, and other applicable laws. Therefore, you must treat the Software like any other copyrighted material (for example, a book or musical recording) except that you may either: (i) make 1 copy of the transportable part of the Software (which typically is supplied on diskette, CD-ROM, or downloadable internet), solely for back-up purposes; or (ii) copy the transportable part of the Software to a PC hard disk, provided you keep the original solely for back-up purposes. If the Documentation is in printed form, it may not be copied. If the Documentation is in electronic form, you may print out 1 copy, which then may not be copied. With regard to the copy made for backup or archival purposes, you agree to reproduce any Cambium Networks copyright notice, and other proprietary legends appearing thereon. Such copyright notice(s) may appear in any of several forms, including machine-readable form, and you agree to reproduce such notice in each form in which it appears, to the extent it is physically possible to do so. Unauthorized duplication of the Software or Documentation constitutes copyright infringement, and in the United States is punishable in federal court by fine and imprisonment. 5. You will not transfer, directly or indirectly, any product, technical data or software to any country for which the United States Government requires an export license or other governmental approval without first obtaining such license or approval. TITLE AND RESTRICTIONS If you transfer possession of any copy of the Software and Documentation to another party outside of the terms of this agreement, your license is automatically terminated. Title and copyrights to the Software and Documentation and any copies made by you remain with Cambium Networks and its licensors. You will not, and will not permit others to: (i) modify, translate, decompile, bootleg, reverse engineer, disassemble, or extract the inner workings of the Software or Documentation, (ii) copy the look-and-feel or functionality of the Software or Documentation; (iii) remove any proprietary notices, marks, labels, or logos from the Software or Documentation; (iv) rent or transfer all or some of the Software or Documentation to any other party without Cambium’s prior written consent; or (v) utilize any computer software or hardware which is designed to defeat any copy protection device, should the Software and Documentation be equipped with such a protection device. If the Software and Documentation is provided on multiple types of media (such as diskette, CD-ROM, downloadable internet), then you will only use the medium which best meets your specific needs, and will not loan, rent, lease, or transfer the other media contained in the package without Cambium’s written consent. Unauthorized copying of the Software or Documentation, or failure to comply with any of the provisions of this Agreement, will result in automatic termination of this license. 210
CAMBIUM NETWORKS CONFIDENTIALITY You acknowledge that all Software and Documentation contain valuable proprietary information and trade secrets and that unauthorized or improper use of the Software and Documentation will result in irreparable harm to Cambium Networks for which monetary damages would be inadequate and for which Cambium Networks will be entitled to immediate injunctive relief. If applicable, you will limit access to the Software and Documentation to those of your employees and agents who need to use the Software and Documentation for your internal business purposes, and you will take appropriate action with those employees and agents to preserve the confidentiality of the Software and Documentation, using the same degree of care to avoid unauthorized or improper disclosure as you use for the protection of your own proprietary software, but in no event less than reasonable care. You have no obligation to preserve the confidentiality of any proprietary information that: (i) was in the public domain at the time of disclosure; (ii) entered the public domain through no fault of yours; (iii) was given to you free of any obligation to keep it confidential; (iv) is independently developed by you; or (v) is disclosed as required by law provided that you notify Cambium Networks prior to such disclosure and provide Cambium Networks with a reasonable opportunity to respond. RIGHT TO USE CAMBIUM’S NAME Except as required in “Conditions of use”, you will not, during the term of this Agreement or thereafter, use any trademark of Cambium Networks, or any word or symbol likely to be confused with any Cambium Networks trademark, either alone or in any combination with another word or words. TRANSFER The Software and Documentation may not be transferred to another party without the express written consent of Cambium Networks, regardless of whether or not such transfer is accomplished by physical or electronic means. Cambium’s consent may be withheld at its discretion and may be conditioned upon transferee paying all applicable license fees and agreeing to be bound by this Agreement. UPDATES During the first 12 months after purchase of a Product, or during the term of any executed Maintenance and Support Agreement for the Product, you are entitled to receive Updates. An “Update” means any code in any form which is a bug fix, patch, error correction, or minor enhancement, but excludes any major feature added to the Software. Updates are available for download at the support website. Major features may be available from time to time for an additional license fee. If Cambium Networks makes available to you major features and no other end user license agreement is provided, then the terms of this Agreement will apply. MAINTENANCE Except as provided above, Cambium Networks is not responsible for maintenance or field service of the Software under this Agreement. 211
CAMBIUM NETWORKS DISCLAIMER CAMBIUM NETWORKS DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, WHETHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED, STATUTORY, OR IN ANY COMMUNICATION WITH YOU. CAMBIUM NETWORKS SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTY INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILTY, NONINFRINGEMENT, OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTATION ARE PROVIDED “AS IS.” CAMBIUM NETWORKS DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE SOFTWARE WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS, OR THAT THE OPERATION OF THE SOFTWARE WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR FREE, OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE SOFTWARE WILL BE CORRECTED. CAMBIUM NETWORKS MAKES NO WARRANTY WITH RESPECT TO THE CORRECTNESS, ACCURACY, OR RELIABILITY OF THE SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTATION. Some jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion of implied warranties, so the above exclusion may not apply to you. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY IN NO EVENT SHALL CAMBIUM NETWORKS BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY OTHER PARTY FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, EXEMPLARY OR OTHER DAMAGE ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCT (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF BUSINESS PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF BUSINESS INFORMATION OR ANY OTHER PECUNIARY LOSS, OR FROM ANY BREACH OF WARRANTY, EVEN IF CAMBIUM NETWORKS HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. (Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the above exclusion or limitation may not apply to you.) IN NO CASE SHALL CAMBIUM’S LIABILITY EXCEED THE AMOUNT YOU PAID FOR THE PRODUCT. U.S. GOVERNMENT If you are acquiring the Product on behalf of any unit or agency of the U.S. Government, the following applies. Use, duplication, or disclosure of the Software and Documentation is subject to the restrictions set forth in subparagraphs (c) (1) and (2) of the Commercial Computer Software – Restricted Rights clause at FAR 52.227-19 (JUNE 1987), if applicable, unless being provided to the Department of Defense. If being provided to the Department of Defense, use, duplication, or disclosure of the Products is subject to the restricted rights set forth in subparagraph (c) (1) (ii) of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252.227-7013 (OCT 1988), if applicable. Software and Documentation may or may not include a Restricted Rights notice, or other notice referring specifically to the terms and conditions of this Agreement. The terms and conditions of this Agreement will each continue to apply, but only to the extent that such terms and conditions are not inconsistent with the rights provided to you under the aforementioned provisions of the FAR and DFARS, as applicable to the particular procuring agency and procurement transaction. 212
CAMBIUM NETWORKS TERM OF LICENSE Your right to use the Software will continue in perpetuity unless terminated as follows. Your right to use the Software will terminate immediately without notice upon a breach of this Agreement by you. Within 30 days after termination of this Agreement, you will certify to Cambium Networks in writing that through your best efforts, and to the best of your knowledge, the original and all copies, in whole or in part, in any form, of the Software and all related material and Documentation, have been destroyed, except that, with prior written consent from Cambium Networks, you may retain one copy for archival or backup purposes. You may not sublicense, assign or transfer the license or the Product, except as expressly provided in this Agreement. Any attempt to otherwise sublicense, assign or transfer any of the rights, duties or obligations hereunder is null and void. GOVERNING LAW This Agreement is governed by the laws of the United States of America to the extent that they apply and otherwise by the laws of the State of Illinois. ASSIGNMENT This agreement may not be assigned by you without Cambium’s prior written consent. SURVIVAL OF PROVISIONS The parties agree that where the context of any provision indicates an intent that it survives the term of this Agreement, then it will survive. ENTIRE AGREEMENT This agreement contains the parties’ entire agreement regarding your use of the Software and may be amended only in writing signed by both parties, except that Cambium Networks may modify this Agreement as necessary to comply with applicable laws. THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE The software may contain one or more items of Third-Party Software supplied by other third-party suppliers. The terms of this Agreement govern your use of any Third-Party Software UNLESS A SEPARATE THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE LICENSE IS INCLUDED, IN WHICH CASE YOUR USE OF THE THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE WILL THEN BE GOVERNED BY THE SEPARATE THIRD-PARTY LICENSE. Aquila Copyright (c) 2002-2010, Atheros Communications Inc. Copyright (c) 2002-2005 Sam Leffler, Errno Consulting Copyright (C) 2011 Denali Software Inc. All rights reserved Permission to use, copy, modify, and/or distribute this software for any purpose with or without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND THE AUTHOR DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES 213
CAMBIUM NETWORKS WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE. ================================================== Redistribution and use in source and binary forms are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 1. The materials contained herein are unmodified and are used unmodified. 2. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following NO ''WARRANTY'' disclaimer below (''Disclaimer''), without modification. 3. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce at minimum a disclaimer similar to the Disclaimer below and any redistribution must be conditioned upon including a substantially similar Disclaimer requirement for further binary redistribution. 4. Neither the names of the above-listed copyright holders nor the names of any contributors may be used to endorse or promote product derived from this software without specific prior written permission. NO WARRANTY THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS ''AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF NONINFRINGEMENT,MERCHANTIBILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY 214
CAMBIUM NETWORKS OF SUCH DAMAGES. Linux Kernel Copyright (c) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation NOTE! This copyright does *not* cover user programs that use kernel services by normal system calls - this is merely considered normal use of the kernel, and does *not* fall under the heading of "derived work". Also note that the GPL below is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, but the instance of code that it refers to (the Linux kernel) is copyrighted by me and others who actually wrote it. Also note that the only valid version of the GPL as far as the kernel is concerned is _this_ particular version of the license (ie v2, not v2.2 or v3.x or whatever), unless explicitly otherwise stated. Linus Torvalds ---------------------------------------- GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2, June 1991 Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 51 Franklin St, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. See full license text on page 223. gpio_keys /* * Driver for keys on GPIO lines capable of generating interrupts. * * Copyright 2005 Phil Blundell * * This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify * it under the terms of the GNU General Public License version 2 as * published by the Free Software Foundation. */ OpenWrt GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2, June 1991 Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA 215
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. See full license text on page 223. uboot Copyright (c) 2007 Wolfgan Denk, DENIX Software Engeneering, wd@denix.de # (C) Copyright 2000 - 2005 # Wolfgang Denk, DENX Software Engineering, wd@denx.de. # # See file CREDITS for list of people who contributed to this # project. # # This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or # modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as # published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of # the License, or (at your option) any later version. # # This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, # but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of # MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the # GNU General Public License for more details. # # You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License # along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software # Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, # MA 02111-1307 USA See full license text on page 223. jQuery The MIT License (MIT) Copyright (c) 2013 The jQuery Foundation. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES 216
CAMBIUM NETWORKS OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. Data-Driven Document Copyright (c) 2012, Michael Bostock Copyright (c) 2013, Michael Bostock All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: * Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. * Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. * The name Michael Bostock may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL MICHAEL BOSTOCK BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. 217
CAMBIUM NETWORKS AjaxFileUpload The MIT License (MIT) Copyright 2013-2014 powered by PHPLETTER Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. 218
CAMBIUM NETWORKS jquery.caret The MIT License (MIT) Copyright (c) 2010 C. F., Wong Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. jquery.cookie Copyright 2013 Klaus Hartl Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. 219
CAMBIUM NETWORKS json2.js http://www.JSON.org/json2.js 2010-08-25 Public Domain. NO WARRANTY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED. USE AT YOUR OWN RISK. See http://www.JSON.org/js.html This code must be minified before deployment. See http://javascript.crockford.com/jsmin.html USE YOUR OWN COPY. IT IS EXTREMELY UNWISE TO LOAD CODE FROM SERVERS YOU DO NOT CONTROL. jquery.noty Copyright (c) 2012 Nedim Arabacı Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. 220
CAMBIUM NETWORKS SlickGrid Copyright (c) 2009-2012 Michael Leibman Copyright (c) 2010 Michael Leibman http://github.com/mleibman/slickgrid Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. 221
CAMBIUM NETWORKS jquery.event.drag The MIT License (MIT) Copyright (c) 2010 Three Dub Media Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. IE9.js The MIT License (MIT) Copyright (c) 2004-2010, Dean Edwards Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. 222
CAMBIUM NETWORKS busybox --- A note on GPL versions BusyBox is distributed under version 2 of the General Public License (included in its entirety, below). Version 2 is the only version of this license which this version of BusyBox (or modified versions derived from this one) may be distributed under. ------------------------------------------------------------------------ GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2, June 1991 Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 51 Franklin St, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. Preamble The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software--to make sure the software is free for all its users. This General Public License applies to most of the Free Software Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU Lesser General Public License instead.) You can apply it to your programs, too. When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things. To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it. For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights. 223
CAMBIUM NETWORKS We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and (2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the software. Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original authors' reputations. Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all. The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION 0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed under the terms of this General Public License. The "Program", below, refers to any such program or work, and a "work based on the Program" means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term "modification".) Each licensee is addressed as "you". Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Program (independent of having been made by running the Program). Whether that is true depends on what the Program does. 1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and 224
CAMBIUM NETWORKS disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License along with the Program. You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee. 2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions: a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change. b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License. c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run, you must cause it, when started running for such interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this License. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on the Program is not required to print an announcement.) These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part 225
CAMBIUM NETWORKS regardless of who wrote it. Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Program. In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License. 3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following: a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or, b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or, c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding source code. (This alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you received the program in object code or executable form with such an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.) The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a special exception, the source code distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or 226
CAMBIUM NETWORKS binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable. If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place counts as distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code. 4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance. 5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Program or works based on it. 6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this License. 7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to 227
CAMBIUM NETWORKS refrain entirely from distribution of the Program. If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances. It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system, which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice. This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License. 8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Program under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License. 9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and "any later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation. 10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software 228
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally. NO WARRANTY 11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. 12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS dnsmasq # This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify # it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by # the Free Software Foundation; version 2 dated June, 1991, or # (at your option) version 3 dated 29 June, 2007. See full license text on page 223. dropbear Dropbear contains a number of components from different sources, hence there are a few licenses and authors involved. All licenses are fairly non-restrictive. 229
CAMBIUM NETWORKS The majority of code is written by Matt Johnston, under the license below. Portions of the client-mode work are (c) 2004 Mihnea Stoenescu, under the same license: Copyright (c) 2002-2008 Matt Johnston Portions copyright (c) 2004 Mihnea Stoenescu All rights reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. ===== LibTomCrypt and LibTomMath are written by Tom St Denis, and are Public Domain. ===== sshpty.c is taken from OpenSSH 3.5p1, Copyright (c) 1995 Tatu Ylonen <ylo@cs.hut.fi>, Espoo, Finland All rights reserved "As far as I am concerned, the code I have written for this software can be used freely for any purpose. Any derived versions of this software must be clearly marked as such, and if the derived work is incompatible with the protocol description in the RFC file, it must be called by a name other than "ssh" or "Secure Shell". " ===== 230
CAMBIUM NETWORKS loginrec.c loginrec.h atomicio.h atomicio.c and strlcat() (included in util.c) are from OpenSSH 3.6.1p2, and are licensed under the 2 point BSD license. loginrec is written primarily by Andre Lucas, atomicio.c by Theo de Raadt. strlcat() is (c) Todd C. Miller ===== Import code in keyimport.c is modified from PuTTY's import.c, licensed as follows: PuTTY is copyright 1997-2003 Simon Tatham. Portions copyright Robert de Bath, Joris van Rantwijk, Delian Delchev, Andreas Schultz, Jeroen Massar, Wez Furlong, Nicolas Barry, Justin Bradford, and CORE SDI S.A. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. 231
CAMBIUM NETWORKS ebtables Copyright (C) 1999 Paul `Rusty' Russell & Michael J. Neuling Copyright (C) 2001-2002 Bart De Schuymer All code in this package, including the code from the extensions, is released under the GPL license, which you find hereafter. GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2, June 1991 Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. See full license text on page 223. eventlog Copyright (c) 2003 BalaBit IT Ltd. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 3. Neither the name of BalaBit nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY BALABIT AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. 232
CAMBIUM NETWORKS firewall # Copyright (C) 2009-2010 OpenWrt.org glib2 Copyright (C) 2007-2011 OpenWrt.org Copyright (C) 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Copyright © 2004 Scott James Remnant <scott@netsplit.com>. Copyright (c) 1997-2006 University of Cambridge. Copyright © 2009 Codethink Limited Copyright (C) 2008-2010 Red Hat, Inc. Copyright (C) 2008 Hans Breuer Copyright (C) 2008, 2010 Collabora, Ltd. GNU LIBRARY GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2, June 1991 Copyright (C) 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. [This is the first released version of the library GPL. It is numbered 2 because it goes with version 2 of the ordinary GPL.] See full license text on page 223. hostapd Copyright (c) 2002-2011, Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi> and contributors All Rights Reserved. These programs are dual-licensed under both the GPL version 2 and BSD license (the one with advertisement clause removed). Either license may be used at your option. This package may include either wpa_supplicant, hostapd, or both. See README file respective subdirectories (wpa_supplicant/README or hostapd/README) for more details. See full license text on page 223. hotplug GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2, June 1991 See full license text on page 223. iperf Copyright 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004 The Board of Trustees of the University of Illinois All rights reserved 233
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software (Iperf) and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimers. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimers in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. Neither the names of the University of Illinois, NCSA, nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this Software without specific prior written permission. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE CONTIBUTORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. iproute2 GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2, June 1991 Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 51 Franklin St, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. See full license text on page 223. iptables GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2, June 1991 Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. See full license text on page 223. iputils /* * Copyright (c) 1989 The Regents of the University of California. 234
CAMBIUM NETWORKS * All rights reserved. * * This code is derived from software contributed to Berkeley by * Mike Muuss. * * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions * are met: * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. * 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the * documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. * 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software * must display the following acknowledgement: * This product includes software developed by the University of * California, Berkeley and its contributors. * 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors * may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software * without specific prior written permission. * * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. */ Button-hotplug Copyright (C) 2008 Gabor Juhos <juhosg@openwrt.org> Based on the diag.c - GPIO interface driver for Broadcom boards Copyright (C) 2006 Mike Baker <mbm@openwrt.org>, Copyright (C) 2006-2007 Felix Fietkau <nbd@openwrt.org> Copyright (C) 2008 Andy Boyett <agb@openwrt.org> GPL v2 See full license text on page 223. 235
CAMBIUM NETWORKS libdbi GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2.1, February 1999 Copyright (C) 1991, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. [This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL. It also counts as the successor of the GNU Library Public License, version 2, hence the version number 2.1.] See full license text on page 223. libiconv # Copyright (C) 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, # 2005 Free Software Foundation, Inc. /* Copyright (C) 1992,1995-1999,2000-2002,2005-2006 Free Software Foundation, Inc. This file is part of the GNU C Library. /* Copyright (C) 1999-2001, 2003 Bruno Haible. This file is not part of the GNU LIBICONV Library. This file is put into the public domain. */ /* * Copyright (C) 1999-2001, 2005 Free Software Foundation, Inc. * This file is part of the GNU LIBICONV Library. * * The GNU LIBICONV Library is free software; you can redistribute it * and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU Library General Public * License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 * of the License, or (at your option) any later version. * * The GNU LIBICONV Library is distributed in the hope that it will be * useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU * Library General Public License for more details. */ /* Copyright (C) 1999-2004, 2006 Free Software Foundation, Inc. This file is part of the GNU LIBICONV Tools. This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify 236
CAMBIUM NETWORKS it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) any later version. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details. */ /* Copyright (C) 2000-2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc. This file is part of the GNU CHARSET Library. This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU Library General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) any later version. */ # This originates from X11R5 (mit/util/scripts/install.sh), which was # later released in X11R6 (xc/config/util/install.sh) with the # following copyright and license. # # Copyright (C) 1994 X Consortium # # Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy # of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to # deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the # rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or # sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is # furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: # # The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in # all copies or substantial portions of the Software. # # THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR # IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, # FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE # X CONSORTIUM BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN # AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNEC- # TION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE 237
CAMBIUM NETWORKS SOFTWARE. # # Except as contained in this notice, the name of the X Consortium shall not # be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other deal- # ings in this Software without prior written authorization from the X Consor- # tium. # # # FSF changes to this file are in the public domain. # # Calling this script install-sh is preferred over install.sh, to prevent # `make' implicit rules from creating a file called install from it # when there is no Makefile. # # This script is compatible with the BSD install script, but was written # from scratch. It can only install one file at a time, a restriction # shared with many OS's install programs. See full license text on page 223. libiwinfo Copyright (C) 2010-2012 Jo-Philipp Wich <xm@subsignal.org> Copyright (C) 2003-2004 Greg Kroah-Hartman <greg@kroah.com> Copyright (C) 2004-2006 Kay Sievers <kay.sievers@vrfy.org> Copyright (C) 2004 Harald Hoyer <harald@redhat.com> Copyright (C) 2004 Harald Hoyer <harald@redhat.com> Copyright (c) 2001 Atsushi Onoe Copyright (c) 2002-2005 Sam Leffler, Errno Consulting Copyright (c) 1997-2007 Jean Tourrilhes, All Rights Reserved. Copyright 2008 Michael Buesch <mb@bu3sch.de> Copyright 2008, 2009 Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> Copyright 2008 Jouni Malinen <jouni.malinen@atheros.com> Copyright 2008 Colin McCabe <colin@cozybit.com> Copyright 2006, Broadcom Corporation Copyright 2006-2010 Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net> /* * iwinfo - Wireless Information Library - Command line frontend * * Copyright (C) 2011 Jo-Philipp Wich <xm@subsignal.org> * * The iwinfo library is free software: you can redistribute it and/or * modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License version 2 * as published by the Free Software Foundation. * * The iwinfo library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. 238
CAMBIUM NETWORKS * See the GNU General Public License for more details. * * You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along * with the iwinfo library. If not, see http://www.gnu.org/licenses/. */ See full license text on page 223. Libnl-tiny LGPLv2.1 /* * lib/attr.c Netlink Attributes * * This library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or * modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public * License as published by the Free Software Foundation version 2.1 * of the License. * * Copyright (c) 2003-2008 Thomas Graf <tgraf@suug.ch> */ See full license text on page 223. libpcap Copyright (c) 1999 - 2005 NetGroup, Politecnico di Torino (Italy) Copyright (c) 2005 - 2008 CACE Technologies, Davis (California) Copyright (c) 1997 Yen Yen Lim and North Dakota State University Copyright (c) 1995-1999 Kungliga Tekniska Högskolan Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1988 - 1998, 2000 The Regents of the University of California Copyright (c) 2000 Torsten Landschoff <torsten@debian.org>, Sebastian Krahmer <krahmer@cs.uni-potsdam.de> Copyright (c) 2006 Paolo Abeni (Italy) Copyright (c) 2007 Fulko Hew, SITA INC Canada, Inc <fulko.hew@sita.aero> Copyright (c) 2001 Atsushi Onoe Copyright (c) 2002-2005 Sam Leffler, Errno Consulting Copyright 1989 by Carnegie Mellon Copyright (c) 1996 Juniper Networks, Inc. Copyright (c) 1993,1994 Texas A&M University. Copyright (C) 1995, 1996, 1997, and 1998 WIDE Project. Portions Copyright (c) 1993 by Digital Equipment Corporation. Copyright (C) 1999 WIDE Project. Copyright (c) 2005 - 2006 CACE Technologies, Davis (California) (Ref: libpcap-1.0.0/LICENSE) License: BSD 239
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 3. The names of the authors may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ``AS IS'' AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. libtool GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2, June 1991 Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. See full license text on page 223. 240
CAMBIUM NETWORKS lua Lua License ----------- Lua is licensed under the terms of the MIT license reproduced below. This means that Lua is free software and can be used for both academic and commercial purposes at absolutely no cost. For details and rationale, see http://www.lua.org/license.html . =============================================================================== Copyright (C) 1994-2008 Lua.org, PUC-Rio. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. 241
CAMBIUM NETWORKS LuCi Copyright (C) 2003-2012 Edgewall Software All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 3. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR `AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. mtd Copyright © 2005 Waldemar Brodkorb <wbx@dass-it.de> Copyright (C) 2005-2009 Felix Fietkau < ndb@openwrt.org> # # Copyright (C) 2006-2009 OpenWrt.org # # This is free software, licensed under the GNU General Public License v2. # See full license text on page 223. 242
CAMBIUM NETWORKS ncurses Copyright (c) 1998-2004,2006 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, distribute with modifications, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ABOVE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. Except as contained in this notice, the name(s) of the above copyright holders shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization. Net-snmp Copyright 1989, 1991, 1992 by Carnegie Mellon University Derivative Work - 1996, 1998-2000 Copyright 1996, 1998-2000 The Regents of the University of California Networks Associates Technology, Inc copyright notice (BSD) Copyright (c) 2001-2003, Networks Associates Technology, Inc Cambridge Broadband Ltd. copyright notice (BSD) Portions of this code are copyright (c) 2001-2003, Cambridge Broadband Ltd. Copyright © 2003 Sun Microsystems, Inc., 4150 Network Circle, Santa Clara, California 95054, U.S.A. Copyright (c) 2003-2008, Sparta, Inc Copyright (c) 2004, Cisco, Inc and Information Network Center of Beijing University of Posts and Telecommunications. Fabasoft R&D Software GmbH & Co KG copyright notice (BSD) Copyright (c) Fabasoft R&D Software GmbH & Co KG, 2003 oss@fabasoft.com Author: Bernhard Penz <bernhard.penz@fabasoft.com> BSD like: Permission to use, copy, modify and distribute this software and its 243
CAMBIUM NETWORKS documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice appears in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation, and that the name of CMU and The Regents of the University of California not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific written permission. CMU AND THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE, INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL CMU OR THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM THE LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE. BSD: Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: * Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. * Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. * Neither the name of the Networks Associates Technology, Inc nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, 244
CAMBIUM NETWORKS EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. openssh # # Copyright (C) 2006, 2008-2011 OpenWrt.org # # This is free software, licensed under the GNU General Public License v2. # # See full license text on page 223. openssl LICENSE ISSUES ============== The OpenSSL toolkit stays under a dual license, i.e. both the conditions of the OpenSSL License and the original SSLeay license apply to the toolkit. See below for the actual license texts. Actually both licenses are BSD-style Open Source licenses. In case of any license issues related to OpenSSL please contact openssl-core@openssl.org. OpenSSL License --------------- /* ==================================================================== * Copyright (c) 1998-2011 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved. * * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions * are met: * * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. * * 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in * the documentation and/or other materials provided with the * distribution. * * 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this * software must display the following acknowledgment: * "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project * for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)" 245
CAMBIUM NETWORKS * * 4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to * endorse or promote products derived from this software without * prior written permission. For written permission, please contact * openssl-core@openssl.org. * * 5. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL" * nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their names without prior written * permission of the OpenSSL Project. * * 6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following * acknowledgment: * "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project * for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)" * * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. * ==================================================================== * * This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young * (eay@cryptsoft.com). This product includes software written by Tim * Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com). * */ Original SSLeay License ----------------------- /* Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) * All rights reserved. * * This package is an SSL implementation written 246
CAMBIUM NETWORKS * by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). * The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL. * * This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as * the following conditions are aheared to. The following conditions * apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, * lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation * included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms * except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com). * * Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in * the code are not to be removed. * If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution * as the author of the parts of the library used. * This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or * in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package. * * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions * are met: * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. * 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the * documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. * 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software * must display the following acknowledgement: * "This product includes cryptographic software written by * Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)" * The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the rouines from the library * being used are not cryptographic related :-). * 4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from * the apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement: * "This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)" * * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG ``AS IS'' AND * ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, 247
CAMBIUM NETWORKS WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. * * The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or * derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be * copied and put under another distribution licence * [including the GNU Public Licence.] */ opkg GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2, June 1991 Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. See full license text on page 223. pcre Copyright (c) 1997-2010 University of Cambridge Release 8 of PCRE is distributed under the terms of the "BSD" licence, as specified below. The documentation for PCRE, supplied in the "doc" directory, is distributed under the same terms as the software itself. THE MAIN PCRE LIBRARY --------------------- Written by: Philip Hazel Email local part: ph10 Email domain: cam.ac.uk University of Cambridge Computing Service, Cambridge, England. Copyright (c) 1997-2010 University of Cambridge All rights reserved THE C++ WRAPPER LIBRARY ----------------------- Written by: Google Inc. Copyright (c) 2007-2010 Google Inc All rights reserved 248
CAMBIUM NETWORKS procps GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2, June 1991 Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. See full license text on page 223. px5g Copyright (C) 2009 Steven Barth <steven@midlink.org> Copyright (C) 2009 Paul Bakker <polarssl_maintainer at polarssl dot org> Copyright (C) 2006-2007 Pascal Vizeli <pvizeli@yahoo.de> This library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or Modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public License, version 2.1 as published by the Free Software Foundation. This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU Lesser General Public License for more details. See full license text on page 223. swconfig Copyright (C) 2008-2009 Felix Fietkau <nbd@openwrt.org> Copyright (C) 2010 Martin Mares <mj@ucw.cz> # # Copyright (C) 2008-2010 OpenWrt.org # # This is free software, licensed under the GNU General Public License v2. # See /LICENSE for more information. # See full license text on page 223. Syslog-ng GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2, June 1991 See full license text on page 223. tcp_wrappers Copyright 1995 by Wietse Venema. All rights reserved. Some individual files may be covered by other copyrights. Copyright (c) 1987 Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. /************************************************************************ 249
CAMBIUM NETWORKS * Copyright 1995 by Wietse Venema. All rights reserved. Some individual * files may be covered by other copyrights. * * This material was originally written and compiled by Wietse Venema at * Eindhoven University of Technology, The Netherlands, in 1990, 1991, * 1992, 1993, 1994 and 1995. * * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without * modification, are permitted provided that this entire copyright notice * is duplicated in all such copies. * * This software is provided "as is" and without any expressed or implied * warranties, including, without limitation, the implied warranties of * merchantibility and fitness for any particular purpose. ************************************************************************/ tcpdump Copyright (c) 2001 Seth Webster <swebster@sst.ll.mit.edu> Copyright (C) Andrew Tridgell 1995-1999 Copyright (c) 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 2000 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. License: BSD Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 3. The names of the authors may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ``AS IS'' AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. 250
CAMBIUM NETWORKS uClibc++ LGPL v2.1 GPL v2 See full license text on page 223. Uboot-envtools # # (C) Copyright 2002-2006 # Wolfgang Denk, DENX Software Engineering, wd@denx.de. # # See file CREDITS for list of people who contributed to this # project. # # This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or # modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as # published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of # the License, or (at your option) any later version. # # This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, # but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of # MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the # GNU General Public License for more details. # # You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License # along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software # Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, # MA 02111-1307 USA # See full license text on page 223. 251
CAMBIUM NETWORKS PPPd and PPPoE Copyright to Michal Ostrowski for PPPoE and Paul Mackerras paulus@samba.org PPPoE The PPPoE plugin included in this package is a component of the Roaring Penguin PPPoE package, included in this package courtesy of Roaring Penguin Software. (http://www.roaringpenguin.com). PPPd Copyrights: *********** All of the code can be freely used and redistributed. The individual source files each have their own copyright and permission notice. Pppd, pppstats and pppdump are under BSD-style notices. Some of the pppd plugins are GPL'd. Chat is public domain. Distribution: ************* The primary site for releases of this software is: ftp://ftp.samba.org/pub/ppp/ ($Id: README,v 1.37 2006/05/29 23:51:29 paulus Exp $) James Carlson <carlson@workingcode.com> for PPPd See full license text on page 223. 252
CAMBIUM NETWORKS uci Copyright (C) 2008-2010 OpenWrt.org Copyright (C) 2008 Felix Fietkau nbd@openwrt.org Copyright (C) 2006 Fokus Fraunhofer <carsten.tittel@fokus.fraunhofer.de /* * libuci - Library for the Unified Configuration Interface * Copyright (C) 2008 Felix Fietkau <nbd@openwrt.org> * * This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify * it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public License version 2.1 * as published by the Free Software Foundation * * This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the * GNU General Public License for more details. */ /* * ucimap-example - sample code for the ucimap library * Copyright (C) 2008-2009 Felix Fietkau <nbd@openwrt.org> * * This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify * it under the terms of the GNU General Public License version 2 * as published by the Free Software Foundation * * This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, * but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the * GNU General Public License for more details. */ See full license text on page 223. 253
CAMBIUM NETWORKS udevtigger Copyright (C) 2003 Greg Kroah-Hartman <greg@kroah.com> Copyright (C) 2005-2006 Kay Sievers <kay.sievers@vrfy.org> Copyright (C) 2004 Daniel Walsh Copyright (C) 2004 Ling, Xiaofeng <xiaofeng.ling@intel.com> Copyright (C) 2006 Hannes Reinecke hare@suse.de /* * Copyright (C) 2005-2006 Kay Sievers <kay.sievers@vrfy.org> * * This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it * under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the * Free Software Foundation version 2 of the License. * * This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but * WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of * MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU * General Public License for more details. * * You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along * with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., * 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301, USA. * */ See full license text on page 223. 254
CAMBIUM NETWORKS uhttpd Apache License, Version 2.0 /* * uhttpd - Tiny single-threaded httpd - Main component * * Copyright (C) 2010 Jo-Philipp Wich <xm@subsignal.org> * * Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the "License"); * you may not use this file except in compliance with the License. * You may obtain a copy of the License at * * http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 * * Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software * distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS, * WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. * See the License for the specific language governing permissions and * limitations under the License. */ Wireless-tools Copyright (c) 1997-2007 Jean Tourrilhes <jt@hpl.hp.com> (Ref: wireless_tools.29/COPYING) GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2, June 1991 Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. See full license text on page 223. 255
CAMBIUM NETWORKS zlib (C) 1995-2004 Jean-loup Gailly and Mark Adler jloup@gzip.org madler@alumni.caltech.edu This software is provided 'as-is', without any express or implied warranty. In no event will the authors be held liable for any damages arising from the use of this software. Permission is granted to anyone to use this software for any purpose, including commercial applications, and to alter it and redistribute it freely, subject to the following restrictions: 1. The origin of this software must not be misrepresented; you must not claim that you wrote the original software. If you use this software in a product, an acknowledgment in the product documentation would be appreciated but is not required. 2. Altered source versions must be plainly marked as such, and must not be misrepresented as being the original software. 3. This notice may not be removed or altered from any source distribution. Jean-loup Gailly Mark Adler jloup@gzip.org madler@alumni.caltech.edu lighttpd # # Copyright (C) 2006-2012 OpenWrt.org # # This is free software, licensed under the GNU General Public License v2. # See /LICENSE for more information. # See full license text on page 223. Copyright (c) 2004, Jan Kneschke, incremental All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: - Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. - Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. - Neither the name of the 'incremental' nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without 256
CAMBIUM NETWORKS specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. 257
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Hardware warranty Cambium’s standard hardware warranty is for one (1) year from date of shipment from Cambium Networks or a Cambium Point-To-Multipoint Distributor. Cambium Networks warrants that hardware will conform to the relevant published specifications and will be free from material defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service. Cambium Networks shall within this time, at its own option, either repair or replace the defective product within thirty (30) days of receipt of the defective product. Repaired or replaced product will be subject to the original warranty period but not less than thirty (30) days. 258
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Limit of liability IN NO EVENT SHALL CAMBIUM NETWORKS BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY OTHER PARTY FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, EXEMPLARY OR OTHER DAMAGE ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCT (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF BUSINESS PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF BUSINESS INFORMATION OR ANY OTHER PECUNIARY LOSS, OR FROM ANY BREACH OF WARRANTY, EVEN IF CAMBIUM NETWORKS HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. (Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the above exclusion or limitation may not apply to you.) IN NO CASE SHALL CAMBIUM’S LIABILITY EXCEED THE AMOUNT YOU PAID FOR THE PRODUCT. 259
CAMBIUM NETWORKS System threshold, output power and link loss The following table specifies the system threshold (dBm), output power (dBm) and maximum link loss (dB) per channel bandwidth and modulation mode: • Table 80 - 5 GHz • Table 81 – 2.4 GHz Table 80 5 GHz threshold, power and link loss Modulation mode System threshold (dBm) per channel bandwidth Output power (dBm) Maximum link loss (dB) per channel bandwidth 20 MHz 40 MHz All bands 20 MHz 40 MHz MCS15 -68 -65 23 115 112 MCS14 -70 -67 23 117 114 MCS13 -73 -70 23 120 117 MCS12 -77 -74 23 124 121 MCS11 -81 -79 23 128 126 MCS10 -83 -80 23 130 127 MCS9 -86 -84 23 133 131 MCS1 -89 -87 23 136 134 Table 81 2.4 GHz threshold, power and link loss Modulation mode System threshold (dBm) per channel bandwidth Output power (dBm) Maximum link loss (dB) per channel bandwidth 20 MHz 40 MHz All bands 20 MHz 40 MHz MCS15 -68 -65 23 115 112 MCS14 -70 -67 23 117 114 MCS13 -73 -70 23 120 117 MCS12 -77 -74 23 124 121 MCS11 -81 -79 23 128 126 MCS10 -83 -80 23 130 127 MCS9 -86 -84 23 133 131 MCS1 -89 -87 23 136 134 260
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Compliance with safety standards This section lists the safety specifications against which the ePMP has been tested and certified. It also describes how to keep RF exposure within safe limits. ELECTRICAL SAFETY COMPLIANCE The ePMP hardware has been tested for compliance to the electrical safety specifications listed in Table 82. Table 82 ePMP safety compliance specifications Region Standard USA UL 60950-1, 2nd Edition Canada CSA C22.2 No.60950 2nd Edition International International CB certified and certified to IEC 60950-1:2005 (modified) plus EN60950-1:2006 + A1:2010 ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY (EMC) COMPLIANCE The ePMP complies with European EMC Specification EN301 489-1 with testing carried out to the detailed requirements of EN301 489-4. Table 83 lists the EMC specification type approvals that have been granted for ePMP. Table 83 EMC emissions compliance Region Specification (Type Approvals) USA FCC CFR 47 Part 15 class B Canada RSS210, Issue 8 Europe ETSI EN301 489-4 261
CAMBIUM NETWORKS HUMAN EXPOSURE TO RADIO FREQUENCY ENERGY Standards Relevant standards (USA and EC) applicable when working with RF equipment are: • ANSI IEEE C95.1-1991, IEEE Standard for Safety Levels with Respect to Human Exposure to Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Fields, 3 kHz to 300 GHz. • Council recommendation of 12 July 1999 on the limitation of exposure of the general public to electromagnetic fields (0 Hz to 300 GHz) (1999/519/EC) and respective national regulations. • Directive 2004/40/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 29 April 2004 on the minimum health and safety requirements regarding the exposure of workers to the risks arising from physical agents (electromagnetic fields) (18th individual Directive within the meaning of Article 16(1) of Directive 89/391/EEC). • US FCC limits for the general population. See the FCC web site at http://www.fcc.gov, and the policies, guidelines, and requirements in Part 1 of Title 47 of the Code of Federal Regulations, as well as the guidelines and suggestions for evaluating compliance in FCC OET Bulletin 65. • Health Canada limits for the general population. See the Health Canada web site at http://www.hc-sc.gc.ca/ewh-semt/pubs/radiation/99ehd-dhm237/limits-limites_e.html and Safety Code 6. • EN 50383:2002 Basic standard for the calculation and measurement of electromagnetic field strength and SAR related to human exposure from radio base stations and fixed terminal stations for wireless telecommunication systems (110 MHz - 40 GHz). • BS EN 50385:2002 Product standard to demonstrate the compliances of radio base stations and fixed terminal stations for wireless telecommunication systems with the basic restrictions or the reference levels related to human exposure to radio frequency electromagnetic fields (110 MHz – 40 GHz) – general public. • ICNIRP (International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection) guidelines for the general public. See the ICNIRP web site at http://www.icnirp.de/ and Guidelines for Limiting Exposure to Time-Varying Electric, Magnetic, and Electromagnetic Fields. Power density exposure limit Install the radios for the ePMP family of PMP wireless solutions so as to provide and maintain the minimum separation distances from all persons. The applicable power density exposure limit from the standards (see Human exposure to radio frequency energy on page 262) is: • 10 W/m2 for RF energy in the 5 GHz and 2.4 GHz frequency bands. 262
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Calculation of power density Note The following calculation is based on the ANSI IEEE C95.1-1991 method, as that provides a worst case analysis. Details of the assessment to EN50383:2002 can be provided, if required. Peak power density in the far field of a radio frequency point source is calculated as follows: Where: Is: S power density in W/m2 P maximum average transmit power capability of the radio, in W G total Tx gain as a factor, converted from dB d distance from point source, in m Rearranging terms to solve for distance yields: Calculated distances and power compliance margins Table 84 shows calculated minimum separation distances, recommended distances and resulting margins for each frequency band and antenna combination. These are conservative distances that include compliance margins. At these and greater separation distances, the power density from the RF field is below generally accepted limits for the general population. Explanation of terms used in Table 84: Tx burst – maximum average transmit power in burst (Watt) P – maximum average transmit power capability of the radio (Watt) G – total transmit gain as a factor, converted from dB S – power density (W/m2) d – minimum distance from point source (meters) R – recommended distances (meters) C – compliance factor 24.dGPSπ=SGPd.4.π= 263
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Table 84 Power compliance margins, 5 GHz Band Antenna P (W) G S (W/m2) d (m) R (m) C 5 GHz Integrated, 13 dBi 0.199 20 10 0.18 .4 51 5 GHz Connectorized, 15 dBi 0.199 31.6 10 0.22 .4 32 Table 85 Power compliance margins, 2.4 GHz, AP Conn Type Channel Bandwidth Antenna P (W) G S (W/m2) d (m) R (m) C PMP 20 MHz Connectorized, 8 dBi Omni 0.631 6.3 10 0.18 0.4 50.5 PMP 40 MHz Connectorized, 8 dBi Omni 0.631 6.3 10 0.18 0.4 50.5 PMP 20 MHz Connectorized, 17 dBi Sector 0.079 50.1 10 0.18 0.4 50.5 PMP 40 MHz Connectorized, 17 dBi Sector 0.032 50.1 10 0.11 0.3 71.3 PTP 20 MHz Connectorized, 25 dBi Dish 0.003 316.2 10 0.08 0.2 63.2 PTP 40 MHz Connectorized, 25 dBi Dish 0.003 316.2 10 0.08 0.2 63.2 Table 86 Power compliance margins, 2.4 GHz, STA Conn Type Channel Bandwidth Antenna P (W) G S (W/m2) d (m) R (m) C PMP 20 MHz Connectorized, 8 dBi Omni 0.631 6.3 10 0.18 0.4 50.5 PMP 40 MHz Integrated, 12 dBi Patch 0.251 15.8 10 0.18 0.4 50.5 PMP 20 MHz Connectorized, 17 dBi Sector 0.079 50.1 10 0.18 0.4 50.5 PMP 40 MHz Connectorized, 19 dBi Panel 0.050 79.4 10 0.18 0.4 50.5 PMP 20 MHz Connectorized, 25 dBi Dish 0.010 316.2 10 0.16 0.4 63.5 PMP 40 MHz Connectorized, 8 dBi Omni 0.100 6.3 10 0.07 0.2 79.6 PMP 20 MHz Integrated, 12 dBi Patch 0.050 15.8 10 0.08 0.2 63.2 PMP 40 MHz Connectorized, 17 dBi Sector 0.025 50.1 10 0.10 0.2 39.9 PMP 20 MHz Connectorized, 19 dBi Panel 0.020 79.4 10 0.11 0.3 71.3 PMP 40 MHz Connectorized, 25 dBi Dish 0.006 316.2 10 0.13 0.3 56.7 PTP 20 MHz Integrated, 12 dBi Patch 0.398 15.8 10 0.22 0.4 31.9 264
CAMBIUM NETWORKS PTP 40 MHz Connectorized, 17 dBi Sector 0.158 50.1 10 0.25 0.5 39.5 PTP 20 MHz Connectorized, 19 dBi Panel 0.050 79.4 10 0.18 0.4 50.5 PTP 40 MHz Connectorized, 25 dBi Dish 0.010 316.2 10 0.16 0.4 63.5 PTP 20 MHz Integrated, 12 dBi Patch 0.050 15.8 10 0.08 0.2 63.2 PTP 40 MHz Connectorized, 17 dBi Sector 0.025 50.1 10 0.10 0.2 39.9 PTP 20 MHz Connectorized, 19 dBi Panel 0.020 79.4 10 0.11 0.3 71.3 PTP 40 MHz Connectorized, 25 dBi Dish 0.006 316.2 10 0.13 0.3 56.7 Note Gain of antenna in dBi = 10*log(G). The regulations require that the power used for the calculations is the maximum power in the transmit burst subject to allowance for source-based time-averaging. At 2.4 GHz, 5.4 GHz and EU 5.8 GHz, the products are generally limited to a fixed EIRP which can be achieved with the Integrated Antenna. The calculations above assume that the maximum EIRP allowed by the regulations is being transmitted. Note If there are no EIRP limits in the country of deployment, use the distance calculations for FCC 5.8 GHz for all frequency bands. 265
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Compliance with radio regulations This section describes how the ePMP complies with the radio regulations that are enforced in various countries. Caution Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Cambium Networks could void the user’s authority to operate the system. TYPE APPROVALS This system has achieved Type Approval in various countries around the world. This means that the system has been tested against various local technical regulations and found to comply. The frequency bands in which the system operates may be unlicensed and, in these bands, the system can be used provided it does not cause interference. The system is not guaranteed protection against interference from other products and installations. Table 83 lists the radio specification type approvals that have been granted for ePMP frequency variants. Table 87 Radio certifications Frequency band Region Regulatory approvals 2.4 GHz, 5 GHz USA FCC Part 15 Class B Canada IC RSS-210 Issue 8, Annex 8 (or latest) Europe ETSI EN302 502 v1.2.1 ETSI EN301 893 v1.7.1 FCC AND ETSI COMPLIANCE TESTING The system has been tested for compliance to both US (FCC) and European (ETSI) specifications. It has been shown to comply with the limits for emitted spurious radiation for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules in the USA and appropriate European ENs. These limits have been designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference. However the equipment can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to other radio communications. There is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. 266
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Note A Class B Digital Device is a device that is marketed for use in a residential environment, notwithstanding use in commercial, business and industrial environments. Note Notwithstanding that Cambium Networks has designed (and qualified) the ePMP products to generally meet the Class B requirement to minimize the potential for interference, the ePMP product range is not marketed for use in a residential environment. EXAMPLES OF REGULATORY LIMITS Examples of the regulatory limits that apply in typical regions of operation are in the following tables: • Table 88 – 5.1 GHz • Table 89 – 5.2 GHz • Table 90 – 5.4 GHz • Table 91 – 5.8 GHz • Table 92 – 2.4 GHz Table 88 Regulatory Limits - 5.1 GHz Country Frequency range Valid Center Frequency for 20 MHz Band Valid Center Frequency for 40 MHz Band Conducted Power Argentina 5150-5250 5160-5240 every 5 MHz 5170-5230 every 5 MHz 13 Ecuador 5150-5250 5160-5240 every 5 MHz 5170-5230 every 5 MHz 13 Malaysia 5150-5250 5160-5240 every 5 MHz 5170-5230 every 5 MHz 13 Peru 5150-5250 5160-5240 every 5 MHz 5170-5230 every 5 MHz 13 Philippines 5150-5250 5160-5240 every 5 MHz 5170-5230 every 5 MHz 13 Venezuela 5150-5250 5160-5240 every 5 MHz 5170-5230 every 5 MHz 13 Other 5150-5250 5160-5240 every 5 MHz 5170-5230 every 5 MHz 18 267
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Table 89 Regulatory limits - 5.2 GHz Country Frequency range Valid Center Frequency for 20 MHz Band Valid Center Frequency for 40 MHz Band Conducted Power EIRP Power DFS Argentina 5250-5350 5270 to 5330 every 5MHz 5280 to 5320 every 5MHz 13 Yes Brazil 5250-5350 Canada 5250-5350 5280 to 5320 every 5MHz 5290 to 5310 every 5MHz DIFF between 20MHz/40MHz -> 12 for 20MHz, 13 for 40MHz 30 Yes Chile 5250-5350 5270 to 5330 every 5MHz 5280 to 5320 every 5MHz 13 Yes Colombia 5250-5350 5270 to 5330 every 5MHz 5280 to 5320 every 5MHz 13 Yes Ecuador 5250-5350 5260 to 5340 every 5MHz 5270 to 5330 every 5MHz 13 No Ghana 5250-5350 5270 to 5330 every 5MHz 5280 to 5320 every 5MHz 13 Yes Guam 5250-5350 5280 to 5320 every 5MHz 5290 to 5310 every 5MHz DIFF between 20MHz/40MHz -> 12 for 20MHz, 13 for 40MHz 30 Yes Hong Kong 5250-5350 5270 to 5330 every 5MHz 5280 to 5320 every 5MHz 13 Yes Kenya 5250-5350 5270 to 5330 every 5MHz 5280 to 5320 every 5MHz 13 Yes Malaysia 5250-5350 5270 to 5330 every 5MHz 5280 to 5320 every 5MHz 13 Yes Peru 5250-5350 5270 to 5330 every 5MHz 5280 to 5320 every 5MHz 13 Yes Philippines 5250-5350 5270 to 5330 every 5MHz 5280 to 5320 every 5MHz 13 Yes Puerto Rico 5250-5350 5280 to 5320 every 5MHz 5290 to 5310 every 5MHz DIFF between 20MHz/40MHz -> 12 for 30 Yes 268
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Country Frequency range Valid Center Frequency for 20 MHz Band Valid Center Frequency for 40 MHz Band Conducted Power EIRP Power DFS 20MHz, 13 for 40MHz Taiwan 5250-5350 5280 to 5320 every 5MHz 5290 to 5310 every 5MHz 13 Yes Thailand 5250-5350 5270 to 5330 every 5MHz 5280 to 5320 every 5MHz 13 Yes U.S. Virgin Islands 5250-5350 5280 to 5320 every 5MHz 5290 to 5310 every 5MHz DIFF between 20MHz/40MHz -> 12 for 20MHz, 13 for 40MHz 30 Yes Uganda 5250-5350 5270 to 5330 every 5MHz 5280 to 5320 every 5MHz 18 Yes United States 5250-5350 5280 to 5320 every 5MHz 5290 to 5310 every 5MHz DIFF between 20MHz/40MHz -> 12 for 20MHz, 13 for 40MHz 30 Yes Venezuela 5250-5350 5260 to 5340 every 5MHz 5270 to 5330 every 5MHz 13 No Other 5250-5350 5260 to 5340 every 5MHz 5270 to 5330 every 5MHz 18 No 269
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Table 90 Regulatory limits - 5.4 GHz Country Frequency ranges Valid Center Frequency for 20 MHz Band Valid Center Frequency for 40 MHz Band Conducted Power EIRP Power DFS Argentina 5470-5725 5480 to 5715 every 5MHz 5490 to 5705 every 5MHz 16 None Australia 5470-5600,5650-5725 5485 to 5590 every 5MHz, 5660 to 5710 every 5 MHz 5495 to 5580 every 5MHz, 5670 to 5700 every 5 MHz 15 30 ETSI Austria 5470-5600,5650-5725 5480 to 5590 every 5MHz, 5660 to 5715 every 5 MHz 5490 to 5580 every 5MHz, 5670 to 5705 every 5 MHz 15 30 ETSI Belgium 5470-5600,5650-5725 5480 to 5590 every 5MHz, 5660 to 5715 every 5 MHz 5490 to 5580 every 5MHz, 5670 to 5705 every 5 MHz 15 30 ETSI Bosnia and Herzegovina 5470-5600,5650-5725 5480 to 5590 every 5MHz, 5660 to 5715 every 5 MHz 5490 to 5580 every 5MHz, 5670 to 5705 every 5 MHz 15 30 ETSI Brazil 5470-5725 5480 to 5715 every 5MHz 5490 to 5705 every 5MHz 16 30 FCC Bulgaria 5470-5600,5650-5725 5480 to 5590 every 5MHz, 5660 to 5715 every 5 MHz 5490 to 5580 every 5MHz, 5670 to 5705 every 5 MHz 15 30 ETSI Canada 5470-5600,5650-5725 (*1) 5495 to 5590 every 5MHz, 5660 to 5705 every 5 MHz 5510 to 5580 every 5MHz, 5670 to 5695 every 5 MHz 13 30 FCC Chile 5470-5725 5480 to 5715 every 5MHz 5490 to 5705 every 5MHz 16 30 FCC Colombia 5470-5725 5480 to 5715 every 5MHz 5490 to 5705 every 5MHz 16 30 FCC Croatia 5470-5600,5650-5725 5480 to 5590 every 5MHz, 5660 to 5715 every 5 MHz 5490 to 5580 every 5MHz, 5670 to 5705 every 5 MHz 15 30 ETSI Cyprus 5470-5600,5650-5725 5480 to 5590 every 5MHz, 5660 to 5715 every 5 MHz 5490 to 5580 every 5MHz, 5670 to 5705 every 5 MHz 15 30 ETSI Czech Republic 5470-5600,5650-5725 5480 to 5590 every 5MHz, 5660 to 5715 every 5 MHz 5490 to 5580 every 5MHz, 5670 to 5705 every 5 MHz 15 30 ETSI 270
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Country Frequency ranges Valid Center Frequency for 20 MHz Band Valid Center Frequency for 40 MHz Band Conducted Power EIRP Power DFS Denmark 5470-5600,5650-5725 5480 to 5590 every 5MHz, 5660 to 5715 every 5 MHz 5490 to 5580 every 5MHz, 5670 to 5705 every 5 MHz 15 30 ETSI Ecuador 5470-5725 5480 to 5715 every 5MHz 5490 to 5705 every 5MHz 16 30 None Finland 5470-5600,5650-5725 5480 to 5590 every 5MHz, 5660 to 5715 every 5 MHz 5490 to 5580 every 5MHz, 5670 to 5705 every 5 MHz 15 30 ETSI France 5470-5600,5650-5725 5480 to 5590 every 5MHz, 5660 to 5715 every 5 MHz 5490 to 5580 every 5MHz, 5670 to 5705 every 5 MHz 15 30 ETSI Germany 5470-5600,5650-5725 5480 to 5590 every 5MHz, 5660 to 5715 every 5 MHz 5490 to 5580 every 5MHz, 5670 to 5705 every 5 MHz 15 30 ETSI Ghana 5470-5725 5480 to 5715 every 5MHz 5490 to 5705 every 5MHz 16 30 FCC Greece 5470-5600,5650-5725 5480 to 5590 every 5MHz, 5660 to 5715 every 5 MHz 5490 to 5580 every 5MHz, 5670 to 5705 every 5 MHz 15 30 ETSI Guam 5470-5600,5650-5725 5495 to 5590 every 5MHz, 5660 to 5705 every 5 MHz 5510 to 5580 every 5MHz, 5670 to 5695 every 5 MHz (5.47GHz to 5.55 GHz is 10) (5.55GHz to 5.725 GHz is 13) 30 FCC Hong Kong 5470-5725 5480 to 5715 every 5MHz 5490 to 5705 every 5MHz 15 30 FCC Hungary 5470-5600,5650-5725 5480 to 5590 every 5MHz, 5660 to 5715 every 5 MHz 5490 to 5580 every 5MHz, 5670 to 5705 every 5 MHz 15 30 ETSI Ireland 5470-5600,5650-5725 5480 to 5590 every 5MHz, 5660 to 5715 every 5 MHz 5490 to 5580 every 5MHz, 5670 to 5705 every 5 MHz 15 30 ETSI Italy 5470-5600,5650-5725 5480 to 5590 every 5MHz, 5660 to 5715 every 5 MHz 5490 to 5580 every 5MHz, 5670 to 5705 every 5 MHz 15 30 ETSI Kenya 5470-5725 5480 to 5715 every 5MHz 5490 to 5705 every 5MHz 16 30 FCC 271
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Country Frequency ranges Valid Center Frequency for 20 MHz Band Valid Center Frequency for 40 MHz Band Conducted Power EIRP Power DFS Latvia 5470-5600,5650-5725 5480 to 5590 every 5MHz, 5660 to 5715 every 5 MHz 5490 to 5580 every 5MHz, 5670 to 5705 every 5 MHz 15 30 ETSI Liechtenstein 5470-5600,5650-5725 5480 to 5590 every 5MHz, 5660 to 5715 every 5 MHz 5490 to 5580 every 5MHz, 5670 to 5705 every 5 MHz 15 30 ETSI Lithuania 5470-5600,5650-5725 5480 to 5590 every 5MHz, 5660 to 5715 every 5 MHz 5490 to 5580 every 5MHz, 5670 to 5705 every 5 MHz 15 30 ETSI Luxembourg 5470-5600,5650-5725 5480 to 5590 every 5MHz, 5660 to 5715 every 5 MHz 5490 to 5580 every 5MHz, 5670 to 5705 every 5 MHz 15 30 ETSI Macedonia 5470-5600,5650-5725 5480 to 5590 every 5MHz, 5660 to 5715 every 5 MHz 5490 to 5580 every 5MHz, 5670 to 5705 every 5 MHz 15 30 ETSI Malaysia 5470-5725 5480 to 5715 every 5MHz 5490 to 5705 every 5MHz 16 Malta 5470-5600,5650-5725 5480 to 5590 every 5MHz, 5660 to 5715 every 5 MHz 5490 to 5580 every 5MHz, 5670 to 5705 every 5 MHz 15 30 ETSI Mauritius 5470-5725 5480 to 5715 every 5MHz 5490 to 5705 every 5MHz 15 30 ETSI Mexico 5470-5600,5650-5725 5495 to 5590 every 5MHz, 5660 to 5705 every 5 MHz 5510 to 5580 every 5MHz, 5670 to 5695 every 5 MHz 16 30 FCC Netherlands 5470-5600,5650-5725 5480 to 5590 every 5MHz, 5660 to 5715 every 5 MHz 5490 to 5580 every 5MHz, 5670 to 5705 every 5 MHz 15 30 ETSI Netherlands Antilles 5470-5600,5650-5725 5480 to 5590 every 5MHz, 5660 to 5715 every 5 MHz 5490 to 5580 every 5MHz, 5670 to 5705 every 5 MHz 15 30 ETSI Nigeria 5470-5725 5480 to 5715 every 5MHz 5490 to 5705 every 5MHz 15 36 Norway 5470-5600,5650-5725 5480 to 5590 every 5MHz, 5660 to 5715 every 5 MHz 5490 to 5580 every 5MHz, 5670 to 5705 every 5 MHz 15 30 ETSI 272
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Country Frequency ranges Valid Center Frequency for 20 MHz Band Valid Center Frequency for 40 MHz Band Conducted Power EIRP Power DFS Oman 5470-5725 5480 to 5715 every 5MHz 5490 to 5705 every 5MHz 15 30 ETSI Peru 5470-5725 5480 to 5715 every 5MHz 5490 to 5705 every 5MHz 16 30 ETSI Philippines 5470-5725 5480 to 5715 every 5MHz 5490 to 5705 every 5MHz 16 26 Poland 5470-5600,5650-5725 5480 to 5590 every 5MHz, 5660 to 5715 every 5 MHz 5490 to 5580 every 5MHz, 5670 to 5705 every 5 MHz 15 30 ETSI Portugal 5470-5600,5650-5725 5480 to 5590 every 5MHz, 5660 to 5715 every 5 MHz 5490 to 5580 every 5MHz, 5670 to 5705 every 5 MHz 15 30 ETSI Puerto Rico 5470-5600,5650-5725 5495 to 5590 every 5MHz, 5660 to 5705 every 5 MHz 5510 to 5580 every 5MHz, 5670 to 5695 every 5 MHz (5.47GHz to 5.55 GHz is 10) (5.55GHz to 5.725 GHz is 13) 30 FCC Romania 5470-5600,5650-5725 5480 to 5590 every 5MHz, 5660 to 5715 every 5 MHz 5490 to 5580 every 5MHz, 5670 to 5705 every 5 MHz 15 30 ETSI Serbia 5470-5600,5650-5725 5480 to 5590 every 5MHz, 5660 to 5715 every 5 MHz 5490 to 5580 every 5MHz, 5670 to 5705 every 5 MHz 15 30 ETSI Slovakia 5470-5600,5650-5725 5480 to 5590 every 5MHz, 5660 to 5715 every 5 MHz 5490 to 5580 every 5MHz, 5670 to 5705 every 5 MHz 15 30 ETSI Slovenia 5470-5600,5650-5725 5480 to 5590 every 5MHz, 5660 to 5715 every 5 MHz 5490 to 5580 every 5MHz, 5670 to 5705 every 5 MHz 15 30 ETSI South Africa 5470-5725 5480 to 5715 every 5MHz 5490 to 5705 every 5MHz 15 30 FCC South Korea 5470-5650 5480 to 5640 every 5MHz 5490 to 5630 every 5MHz 16 30 ETSI Spain 5470-5600,5650-5725 5480 to 5590 every 5MHz, 5660 to 5715 every 5 MHz 5490 to 5580 every 5MHz, 5670 to 5705 every 5 MHz 15 30 ETSI 273
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Country Frequency ranges Valid Center Frequency for 20 MHz Band Valid Center Frequency for 40 MHz Band Conducted Power EIRP Power DFS Sweden 5470-5600,5650-5725 5480 to 5590 every 5MHz, 5660 to 5715 every 5 MHz 5490 to 5580 every 5MHz, 5670 to 5705 every 5 MHz 15 30 ETSI Switzerland 5470-5600,5650-5725 5480 to 5590 every 5MHz, 5660 to 5715 every 5 MHz 5490 to 5580 every 5MHz, 5670 to 5705 every 5 MHz 15 30 ETSI Taiwan 5470-5600,5650-5725 5495 to 5590 every 5MHz, 5660 to 5705 every 5 MHz 5510 to 5580 every 5MHz, 5670 to 5695 every 5 MHz 13 30 FCC Thailand 5470-5725 5480 to 5715 every 5MHz 5490 to 5705 every 5MHz 16 30 FCC Turkey 5470-5725 5485 to 5710 every 5MHz 5495 to 5700 every 5MHz 15 30 ETSI U.S. Virgin Islands 5470-5600,5650-5725 5495 to 5590 every 5MHz, 5660 to 5705 every 5 MHz 5510 to 5580 every 5MHz, 5670 to 5695 every 5 MHz (5.47GHz to 5.55 GHz is 10) (5.55GHz to 5.725 GHz is 13) 30 FCC Uganda 5470-5725 5480 to 5715 every 5MHz 5490 to 5705 every 5MHz 19 30 FCC United Kingdom 5470-5600,5650-5725 (*1) 5480 to 5590 every 5MHz, 5660 to 5715 every 5 MHz 5490 to 5580 every 5MHz, 5670 to 5705 every 5 MHz 15 30 ETSI United States 5470-5600,5650-5725 5495 to 5590 every 5MHz, 5660 to 5705 every 5 MHz 5510 to 5580 every 5MHz, 5670 to 5695 every 5 MHz (5.47GHz to 5.55 GHz is 10) (5.55GHz to 5.725 GHz is 13) 30 FCC Venezuela 5470-5725 5480 to 5715 every 5MHz 5490 to 5705 every 5MHz 16 30 None Vietnam Other 5470-5725 5480 to 5715 every 5MHz 5490 to 5705 every 5MHz 19 None Follow AP CC 5470-5725 5480 to 5715 every 5MHz 5490 to 5705 every 5MHz 16 None Generic ETSI 5470-5600,5650-5725 5480 to 5590 every 5MHz, 5660 to 5715 every 5 MHz 5490 to 5580 every 5MHz, 5670 to 5705 every 5 MHz 15 30 ETSI (*1) The band 5600 MHz to 5650 MHz is reserved for the use of weather radars. 274
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Table 91 Regulatory limits - 5.8 GHz Country Frequency ranges Valid Center Frequency for 20 MHz Band Valid Center Frequency for 40 MHz Band Conducted Power EIRP Power DFS Argentina 5725-5825 5735 to 5815 every 5 MHz 5745 to 5805 every 5 MHz 23 None Australia 5725-5850 5740 to 5835 every 5 MHz 5750 to 5825 every 5 MHz 23 36 None Bahrain 5725-5850 5735 to 5840 every 5 MHz 5745 to 5830 every 5 MHz 23 33 ETSI Botswana 5725-5875 5735 to 5865 every 5 MHz 5745 to 5855 every 5 MHz 23 40 Brazil 5725-5850 5740 to 5835 every 5 MHz 5750 to 5825 every 5 MHz 23 PMP AP is 36. Other device/mode has no limit None Canada 5725-5850 5740 to 5835 every 5 MHz 5750 to 5825 every 5 MHz 23 PMP AP is 36. Other device/mode has no limit None Chile 5725-5850 5735 to 5840 every 5 MHz 5745 to 5830 every 5 MHz 23 36 None China 5725-5850 5740 to 5835 every 5 MHz 5750 to 5825 every 5 MHz 23 33 None Colombia 5725-5825 5735 to 5815 every 5 MHz 5745 to 5805 every 5 MHz 23 53 None Denmark (*1) 5725-5795,5815-5875 5735 to 5785 every 5 MHz, 5825 to 5865 every 5 MHz 5745 to 5775 every 5 MHz, 5835 to 5855 every 5 MHz 23 36 ETSI Ecuador 5725-5850 5735 to 5840 every 5 MHz 5745 to 5830 every 5 MHz 23 53 None Finland 5725-5795,5815-5850 5735 to 5785 every 5 MHz, 5825 to 5840 every 5 MHz 5745 to 5775 every 5 MHz, 23 36 ETSI Germany 5755-5875 5765 to 5865 every 5 MHz 5775 to 5855 every 5 MHz 23 36 ETSI Ghana 5725-5825 5740 to 5810 every 5 MHz 5750 to 5800 every 5 MHz 23 36 FCC Greece 5725-5795 5735 to 5785 every 5 MHz 5745 to 5775 every 5 MHz 23 36 ETSI Guam 5725-5850 5740 to 5835 every 5 MHz 5750 to 5825 every 5 MHz 23 PMP AP is 36. Other device/mode has no limit None Hong Kong 5725-5850 5740 to 5835 every 5 MHz 5750 to 5825 every 5 MHz 23 36 None 275
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Country Frequency ranges Valid Center Frequency for 20 MHz Band Valid Center Frequency for 40 MHz Band Conducted Power EIRP Power DFS Iceland 5725-5875 5735 to 5865 every 5 MHz 5745 to 5855 every 5 MHz 23 36 ETSI India 5825-5875 5840 to 5860 every 5 MHz 5850 to 5850 every 5 MHz 23 36 None Indonesia 5725-5825 5735 to 5815 every 5 MHz 5745 to 5805 every 5 MHz 23 36 None Ireland 5725-5875 5740 to 5860 every 5 MHz 5750 to 5850 every 5 MHz 23 33 None Kenya 5725-5850 5735 to 5840 every 5 MHz 5745 to 5830 every 5 MHz 23 36 None Liechtenstein 5725-5795,5815-5875 5735 to 5785 every 5 MHz, 5825 to 5865 every 5 MHz 5745 to 5775 every 5 MHz, 5835 to 5855 every 5 MHz 23 36 ETSI Malaysia 5725-5875 5740 to 5860 every 5 MHz 5750 to 5850 every 5 MHz 23 30 None Mauritius 5725-5850 5735 to 5840 every 5 MHz 5745 to 5830 every 5 MHz 23 36 ETSI Mexico 5725-5850 5740 to 5835 every 5 MHz 5750 to 5825 every 5 MHz 23 36 None New Zealand 5725-5825 5740 to 5810 every 5 MHz 5750 to 5800 every 5 MHz 23 53 Nigeria 5725-5850 5740 to 5835 every 5 MHz 5750 to 5825 every 5 MHz 23 ETSI Norway (*1) 5725-5795,5815-5850 5735 to 5785 every 5 MHz, 5825 to 5840 every 5 MHz 5745 to 5775 every 5 MHz, 23 53 ETSI Oman 5725-5850 5735 to 5840 every 5 MHz 5745 to 5830 every 5 MHz 23 33 ETSI Peru 5725-5850 5735 to 5840 every 5 MHz 5745 to 5830 every 5 MHz 23 36 None Philippines 5725-5825 5740 to 5810 every 5 MHz 5750 to 5800 every 5 MHz 23 30 Portugal 5725-5875 5735 to 5865 every 5 MHz 5745 to 5855 every 5 MHz 23 36 ETSI Puerto Rico 5725-5850 5740 to 5835 every 5 MHz 5750 to 5825 every 5 MHz 23 PMP AP is 36. Other device/mode has no limit None Serbia 5725-5875 5735 to 5865 every 5 MHz 5745 to 5855 every 5 MHz 23 36 ETSI Seychelles 5725-5850 5740 to 5835 every 5 MHz 5750 to 5825 every 5 MHz 23 53 ETSI 276
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Country Frequency ranges Valid Center Frequency for 20 MHz Band Valid Center Frequency for 40 MHz Band Conducted Power EIRP Power DFS Singapore 5725-5850 5740 to 5835 every 5 MHz 5750 to 5825 every 5 MHz 23 30 ETSI South Africa 5725-5850 5735 to 5840 every 5 MHz 5745 to 5830 every 5 MHz 23 53 South Korea 5725-5825 5740 to 5810 every 5 MHz 5750 to 5800 every 5 MHz 23 30 Spain (*1) 5725-5795,5815-5855 5735 to 5785 every 5 MHz, 5825 to 5845 every 5 MHz 5745 to 5775 every 5 MHz, 5835 to 5835 every 5 MHz 23 36 ETSI Switzerland 5725-5795,5815-5875 5735 to 5785 every 5 MHz, 5825 to 5865 every 5 MHz 5745 to 5775 every 5 MHz, 5835 to 5855 every 5 MHz 23 36 ETSI Taiwan 5725-5850 5740 to 5835 every 5 MHz 5750 to 5825 every 5 MHz 23 PMP AP is 36. Other device/mode has no limit None Thailand 5725-5850 5740 to 5835 every 5 MHz 5750 to 5825 every 5 MHz 23 30 None U.S. Virgin Islands 5725-5850 5740 to 5835 every 5 MHz 5750 to 5825 every 5 MHz 23 PMP AP is 36. Other device/mode has no limit None Uganda 5725-5825 5735 to 5815 every 5 MHz 5745 to 5805 every 5 MHz 23 32+2*Ag/3 United Kingdom (*1) 5725-5795,5815-5850 5735 to 5785 every 5 MHz, 5825 to 5840 every 5 MHz 5745 to 5775 every 5 MHz, 23 36 ETSI United States 5725-5850 5740 to 5835 every 5 MHz 5750 to 5825 every 5 MHz 23 PMP AP is 36. Other device/mode has no limit None Venezuela 5725-5850 5735 to 5840 every 5 MHz 5745 to 5830 every 5 MHz 23 36 None Vietnam 5725-5850 5735 to 5840 every 5 MHz 5745 to 5830 every 5 MHz 23 30 None Other 5725-5875 5735 to 5865 every 5 MHz 5745 to 5855 every 5 MHz 23 None Follow AP CC 5725-5875 5735 to 5865 every 5 MHz 5745 to 5855 every 5 MHz 23 None (*1) 5795 MHz to 5815 MHz band is assigned for Road Transport and Traffic Telematics (RTTT). 277
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Table 92 Regulatory limits - 2.4 GHz Country Frequency range Valid Center Frequency for 20 MHz Band Valid Center Frequency for 40 MHz Band Conducted Power Argentina 2400-2500 2412-2462 every 5MHz 2422-2452 every 5MHz 27 Canada 2400-2500 2412-2462 every 5MHz 2427-2452 every 5MHz 27 Ecuador 2400-2500 2412-2462 every 5MHz 2422-2452 every 5MHz 27 Malaysia 2400-2500 2412-2462 every 5MHz 2422-2452 every 5MHz 27 Peru 2400-2500 2412-2462 every 5MHz 2422-2452 every 5MHz 27 Philippines 2400-2500 2412-2462 every 5MHz 2422-2452 every 5MHz 27 United States 2400-2500 2412-2462 every 5MHz 2427-2452 every 5MHz 27 Venezuela 2400-2500 2412-2462 every 5MHz 2422-2452 every 5MHz 27 Other 2400-2500 2412-2462 every 5MHz 2422-2452 every 5MHz 27 278
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Notifications This section contains notifications of compliance with the radio regulations that are enforced in various regions. 2.4 GHZ, 5.4 GHZ REGULATORY COMPLIANCE The ePMP complies with the regulations that are enforced in the USA, Canada and Europe. The relevant notifications are specified in this section. 2.4 GHz, 5.4 GHz FCC and IC notification U.S. Federal Communication Commission (FCC) and Industry Canada (IC) Notification. This device complies with part 15.407 of the US FCC Rules and Regulations and with RSS-210 Issue 8 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. In Canada, users must be cautioned to take note that high power radars are allocated as primary users (meaning they have priority) of 5250 – 5350 MHz and 5470 – 5725 MHz and these radars could cause interference and/or damage to license-exempt local area networks (LELAN). For the connectorized version of the product and in order to reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type and its gain must be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power (EIRP) is not more than that permitted by the regulations. The transmitted power must be reduced to achieve this requirement. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the US FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio-frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with these instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment on and off, the user is encouraged to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: • Increase the separation between the affected equipment and the unit; • Connect the affected equipment to a power outlet on a different circuit from that which the receiver is connected to; • Consult the dealer and/or experienced radio/TV technician for help. FCC IDs and Industry Canada Certification Numbers are reproduced on the product label (Figure 56 and Figure 57). 279
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Figure 56 FCC and IC certifications on 5 GHz product labels 280
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Figure 57 FCC and IC certifications on 2.4 GHz product labels Where necessary, the end user is responsible for obtaining any National licenses required to operate this product and these must be obtained before using the product in any particular country. Contact the appropriate national administrations for details on the conditions of use for the bands in question and any exceptions that might apply. 281
CAMBIUM NETWORKS 5.4 GHz European Union notification The ePMP product is a two-way radio transceiver suitable for use in Broadband Wireless Access System (WAS), Radio Local Area Network (RLAN), or Fixed Wireless Access (FWA) systems. It is a Class 1 device and uses operating frequencies that are harmonized throughout the EU member states. The operator is responsible for obtaining any national licenses required to operate this product and these must be obtained before using the product in any particular country. Hereby, Cambium Networks declares that the ePMP product complies with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. The declaration of conformity may be consulted at the support website. The European R&TTE directive 1999/5/EC Certification Number is reproduced on the product label (Figure 58). Figure 58 European Union certification on 5.4 GHz product label 5.8 GHZ REGULATORY COMPLIANCE This system has achieved Type Approval in various countries around the world. This means that the system has been tested against various local technical regulations and found to comply. The frequency band in which the system operates is “license exempt” and the system is allowed to be used provided it does not cause interference. The licensing authority does not guaranteed protection against interference from other products and installations. For the connectorized version of the product and in order to reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the Effective Isotropically Radiated Power (EIRP) is not more than that permitted for successful communication. U.S. Federal Communication Commission (FCC) This device complies with part 15 of the US FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 282
CAMBIUM NETWORKS This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the US FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio-frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with these instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment on and off, the user is encouraged to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: • Increase the separation between the affected equipment and the unit; • Connect the affected equipment to a power outlet on a different circuit from that which the receiver is connected to; • Consult the dealer and/or experienced radio/TV technician for help. Industry Canada (IC) This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. Cet appareil numérique de la classe B conforme á la norme NMB-003 du Canada. RSS-GEN issue 3 (7.1.3) Licence-Exempt Radio Apparatus: This device complies with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement. In Canada, high power radars are allocated as primary users (meaning they have priority) of the 5650 – 5850 MHz spectrum. These radars could cause interference or damage to license-exempt local area network (LE-LAN) devices. Product labels FCC IDs and Industry Canada Certification Numbers are reproduced on the product label (Figure 59). 283
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Figure 59 FCC and IC certifications on 5.8 GHz product label Where necessary, the end user is responsible for obtaining any National licenses required to operate this product and these must be obtained before using the product in any particular country. Contact the appropriate national administrations for details on the conditions of use for the bands in question and any exceptions that might apply. 284
CAMBIUM NETWORKS 5.8 GHz European Union notification The ePMP is a Class 2 device as it operates on frequencies that are not harmonized across the EU. Currently the product may only be operated in the UK, Eire (IRL), Germany, Norway and Denmark. However, the regulatory situation in Europe is changing and the radio spectrum may become available in other countries in future. See www.ero.dk for further information. The operator is responsible for obtaining any national licenses required to operate this product and these must be obtained before using the product in any particular country. Caution This equipment operates as a secondary application, so it has no rights against harmful interference, even if generated by similar equipment, and must not cause harmful interference on systems operating as primary applications. Hereby, Cambium Networks declares that the ePMP product complies with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. The declaration of conformity may be consulted at the support website. The European R&TTE directive 1999/5/EC Certification Number is reproduced on the product label (Figure 60). Figure 60 European Union certification on 5.8 GHz product label 5.8 GHz operation in the UK The ePMP connectorized product has been notified for operation in the UK, and when operated in accordance with instructions for use it is compliant with UK Interface Requirement IR2007. For UK use, installations must conform to the requirements of IR2007 in terms of EIRP spectral density against elevation profile above the local horizon in order to protect Fixed Satellite Services. The frequency range 5795-5815 MHz is assigned to Road Transport & Traffic Telematics (RTTT) in the U.K. and shall not be used by FWA systems in order to protect RTTT devices. UK Interface Requirement IR2007 specifies that radiolocation services shall be protected by a Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS) mechanism to prevent co-channel operation in the presence of radar signals. 285
CAMBIUM NETWORKS THAILAND NOTIFICATION This telecommunication equipment conforms to the requirements of the National Telecommunications Commission. 286
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Data throughput tables This section contains tables to support calculation of the data rate capacity that can be provided by ePMP configurations, as follows: • Data throughput capacity on page 287 DATA THROUGHPUT CAPACITY Table 93 shows the data throughput rates (Mbits/s) achieved with an AP/STA pair and the link distance (range), is 0 km. Table 93 Throughput for ePMP MCS Spatial Streams Mod. Type Coding Rate 20 MHz 40 MHz DL UL Both DL UL Both MCS15 2 64-QAM 5/6 90.64 28.33 118.97 187.83 55.23 243.06 MCS14 2 64-QAM 3/4 72.93 22.02 94.95 174.46 50.23 224.69 MCS13 2 64-QAM 2/3 53.15 13.52 66.67 151.41 46.54 197.95 MCS12 2 16-QAM 3/4 36.46 10.91 47.37 107.07 29.88 136.95 MCS11 2 16-QAM 1/2 27.57 8.6 37.17 56.66 15.48 72.14 MCS10 2 QPSK 3/4 21.96 7.57 29.53 38 11.67 49.67 MCS9 2 QPSK 1/2 9.31 3.18 12.49 19.06 5.93 24.99 MCS1 1 QPSK 1/2 8.39 2.42 10.81 18.63 5.72 24.35 At zero range. All rates are in Mbit/s. UDP 1518-byte packets, 75%DL/25%UL duty cycle 287
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Radio Specifications CONNECTORIZED RADIO SPECIFICATIONS Table 94 Connectorized Radio specifications, 5 GHz Product SALES MODEL NUMBERS C058900A112A (US/FCC ), C050900A013A (EU), C050900A011A (ROW) Spectrum CHANNEL SPACING Configurable on 5 MHz increments FREQUENCY RANGE 5150 - 5875 MHz CHANNEL WIDTH 20 MHz or 40 MHz Interface MAC (MEDIA ACCESS CONTROL) LAYER Cambium Proprietary PHYSICAL LAYER 2x2 MIMO/OFDM ETHERNET INTERFACE 100/1000BaseT, rate auto negotiated (802.3af compliant) POWERING METHODS SUPPORTED 30V PoE Supply (included), CMM3 & CMM4, 802.3af PoE Supply PROTOCOLS USED IPv4, UDP, TCP, IP, ICMP, SSH, SNMPv2c, HTTP, HTTPs, FTP NETWORK MANAGEMENT HTTP, HTTPs, SSH, FTP, SNMPv2c VLAN 802.1Q with 802.1p priority Performance SUBSCRIBERS PER SECTOR Up to 120 ARQ Yes NOMINAL RECEIVE SENSITIVITY (W/ FEC) @ 20MHZ CHANNEL MCS1 = -89 dBm to MCS15 = -68 dBm (per branch) NOMINAL RECEIVE SENSITIVITY (W/ FEC) @ 40MHZ CHANNEL MCS1 = -87 dBm to MCS15 = -65 dBm (per branch) MAXIMUM DEPLOYMENT RANGE @ 20 MHz CHANNEL Up to 13 miles MAXIMUM DEPLOYMENT RANGE @ 40 MHz CHANNEL Up to 9 miles MODULATION LEVELS (ADAPTIVE) MCS1 (QPSK 1/2) to MCS15 (64QAM 5/6) 288
CAMBIUM NETWORKS LATENCY (nominal, roundtrip) 17 ms GPS SYNCHRONIZATION Yes, via Internal GPS, CMM3, or CMM4 QUALITY OF SERVICE Three level priority (Voice, High, Low) with packet classification by DSCP, COS, VLAN ID, IP & MAC Addr, Link Budget ANTENNA Options Antennas for 90° or 120° sectors are available TRANSMIT POWER RANGE -20 to +30 dBm (combined, to regional EIRP limit) (1 dB interval) ANTENNA GAIN 15 dBi (90° sector) MAXIMUM TRANSMIT POWER 30 dBm combined (5.8 GHz Band) Physical ANTENNA CONNECTION 50 Ω, RP (Rev SURGE SUPPRESSION 1 Joule Integrated ENVIRONMENTAL IP55 TEMPERATURE -30°C to +55°C (-22°F to +131°F) WEIGHT 4.5 kg (10 lbs) with antenna 0.52 kg (1.1 lbs) without antenna WIND SURVIVAL 190 km/hour (118 mi/hour) with antenna DIMENSIONS (H x W x D) Radio: 26.9 x 11 x 7.7 cm (10.6 x 4.3 x 3.0 in) Antenna (excl brackets): 80.4 x 16 x 6.3 cm (31.7 x 6.3 x 2.5 in) Security ENCRYPTION 128-bit AES (CCMP mode) Certifications FCCID Z8H89FT0006 INDUSTRY CANADA CERT 109W-0006 CE EN 302 502 v1.2.1 EN 301 893 v1.7.1 289
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Table 95 Connectorized Radio specifications, 2.4 GHz Product SALES MODEL NUMBERS C024900A011A Spectrum CHANNEL SPACING Configurable on 5 MHz increments FREQUENCY RANGE 2402 - 2472 MHz (20 MHz) 2407 - 2472 MHz (40 MHz) CHANNEL WIDTH 20 MHz or 40 MHz Interface MAC (MEDIA ACCESS CONTROL) LAYER Cambium Proprietary PHYSICAL LAYER 2x2 MIMO/OFDM ETHERNET INTERFACE 100/1000BaseT, rate auto negotiated (802.3af compliant) POWERING METHODS SUPPORTED 30V PoE Supply (included), CMM3 & CMM4, 802.3af PoE Supply PROTOCOLS USED IPv4, UDP, TCP, IP, ICMP, SSH, SNMPv2c, HTTP, HTTPs, FTP NETWORK MANAGEMENT HTTP, HTTPs, SSH, FTP, SNMPv2c VLAN 802.1Q with 802.1p priority Performance SUBSCRIBERS PER SECTOR Up to 120 ARQ Yes NOMINAL RECEIVE SENSITIVITY (W/ FEC) @ 20MHZ CHANNEL MCS1 = -89 dBm to MCS15 = -68 dBm (per branch) NOMINAL RECEIVE SENSITIVITY (W/ FEC) @ 40MHZ CHANNEL MCS1 = -87 dBm to MCS15 = -65 dBm (per branch) MAXIMUM DEPLOYMENT RANGE @ 20 MHz CHANNEL Up to 13 miles MAXIMUM DEPLOYMENT RANGE @ 40 MHz CHANNEL Up to 9 miles MODULATION LEVELS (ADAPTIVE) MCS1 (QPSK 1/2) to MCS15 (64QAM 5/6) LATENCY (nominal, roundtrip) 17 ms GPS SYNCHRONIZATION Yes, via Internal GPS, CMM3, or CMM4 290
CAMBIUM NETWORKS QUALITY OF SERVICE Three level priority (Voice, High, Low) with packet classification by DSCP, COS, VLAN ID, IP & MAC Addr, Link Budget ANTENNA Options Antennas for 90° or 120° sectors are available TRANSMIT POWER RANGE -20 to +30 dBm (combined, to regional EIRP limit) (1 dB interval) ANTENNA GAIN 15 dBi (90° / 120° sector) MAXIMUM TRANSMIT POWER 30 dBm combined Physical ANTENNA CONNECTION 50 Ω, RP (Rev e SURGE SUPPRESSION 1 Joule Integrated ENVIRONMENTAL IP55 TEMPERATURE -30°C to +55°C (-22°F to +131°F) WEIGHT 4.5 kg (10 lbs) with antenna 0.52 kg (1.1 lbs) without antenna WIND SURVIVAL 190 km/hour (118 mi/hour) with antenna DIMENSIONS (H x W x D) Radio: 26.9 x 11 x 7.7 cm (10.6 x 4.3 x 3.0 in) Antenna (excl brackets): 80.4 x 16 x 6.3 cm (31.7 x 6.3 x 2.5 in) Security ENCRYPTION 128-bit AES (CCMP mode) Certifications FCCID Z8H89FT0006 INDUSTRY CANADA CERT 109W-0006 CE EN 302 502 v1.2.1 EN 301 893 v1.7.1 291
CAMBIUM NETWORKS INTEGRATED RADIO SPECIFICATIONS Table 96 Integrated Radio specifications, 5 GHz Product MODEL NUMBER C058900C132A (US/FCC ), C050900C033A (EU), C050900C031A (ROW) Spectrum CHANNEL SPACING Configurable on 5 MHz increments FREQUENCY RANGE 5150 - 5875 MHz CHANNEL WIDTH 20 MHz or 40 MHz Interface MAC (MEDIA ACCESS CONTROL) LAYER Cambium Proprietary PHYSICAL LAYER 2x2 MIMO/OFDM ETHERNET INTERFACE 100BaseT, Cambium PoE (V+ = pins 7 & 8, Return = pins 4 & 5) PROTOCOLS USED IPv4, UDP, TCP, IP, ICMP, SSH, SNMPv2c, HTTPs, FTP NETWORK MANAGEMENT HTTPs, SSH, FTP, SNMPv2c VLAN 802.1Q with 802.1p priority Performance ARQ Yes NOMINAL RECEIVE SENSITIVITY (W/ FEC) @ 20MHZ CHANNEL MCS1 = -89 dBm to MCS15 = -70 dBm (per branch) NOMINAL RECEIVE SENSITIVITY (W/ FEC) @ 40MHZ CHANNEL MCS1 = -87 dBm to MCS15 = -65 dBm (per branch) MAXIMUM DEPLOYMENT RANGE @ 20 MHz CHANNEL Up to 13 miles MODULATION LEVELS (ADAPTIVE) MCS1 (QPSK 1/2) to MCS15 (64QAM 5/6) LATENCY (nominal, roundtrip) 17 ms QUALITY OF SERVICE Three level priority (Voice, High, Low) with packet classification by DSCP, COS, VLAN ID, IP & MAC Addr, Broadcast, Multicast and Station Priority Link Budget ANTENNA BEAM WIDTH 24° azimuth, 12° elevation 292
CAMBIUM NETWORKS TRANSMIT POWER RANGE -20 to +30 dBm (combined, to regional EIRP limit) (1 dB interval) ANTENNA GAIN 13 dBi, integrated patch MAXIMUM TRANSMIT POWER 30 dBm combined (5.8 GHz Band) Physical ANTENNA CONNECTION Integrated patch antenna SURGE SUPPRESSION 1 Joule Integrated ENVIRONMENTAL IP55 TEMPERATURE -30°C to +55°C (-22°F to +131°F) WEIGHT 0.49 kg (1.1 lb.) WIND SURVIVAL 145 km/hour (90 mi/hour) with antenna DIMENSIONS (H x W x D) 29.1 x 14.5 x 8.3 cm (11.4 x 5.7 x 3.3 in) POWER CONSUMPTION 7 W Maximum, 5 W Typical INPUT VOLTAGE 24 to 30 V Security ENCRYPTION 128-bit AES (CCMP mode) Certifications FCCID Z8H89FT0006 INDUSTRY CANADA CERT 109W-0006 CE EN 302 502 v1.2.1 EN 301 893 v1.7.1 293
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Table 97 Integrated Radio specifications, 2.4 GHz Product MODEL NUMBER C024900A031A Spectrum CHANNEL SPACING Configurable on 5 MHz increments FREQUENCY RANGE 2402 - 2472 MHz (20 MHz) 2407 - 2472 MHz (40 MHz) CHANNEL WIDTH 20 MHz or 40 MHz Interface MAC (MEDIA ACCESS CONTROL) LAYER Cambium Proprietary PHYSICAL LAYER 2x2 MIMO/OFDM ETHERNET INTERFACE 100BaseT, Cambium PoE (V+ = pins 7 & 8, Return = pins 4 & 5) PROTOCOLS USED IPv4, UDP, TCP, IP, ICMP, SSH, SNMPv2c, HTTPs, FTP NETWORK MANAGEMENT HTTPs, SSH, FTP, SNMPv2c VLAN 802.1Q with 802.1p priority Performance ARQ Yes NOMINAL RECEIVE SENSITIVITY (W/ FEC) @ 20MHZ CHANNEL MCS1 = -89 dBm to MCS15 = -70 dBm (per branch) NOMINAL RECEIVE SENSITIVITY (W/ FEC) @ 40MHZ CHANNEL MCS1 = -87 dBm to MCS15 = -65 dBm (per branch) MAXIMUM DEPLOYMENT RANGE @ 20 MHz CHANNEL Up to 13 miles MODULATION LEVELS (ADAPTIVE) MCS1 (QPSK 1/2) to MCS15 (64QAM 5/6) LATENCY (nominal, roundtrip) 17 ms QUALITY OF SERVICE Three level priority (Voice, High, Low) with packet classification by DSCP, COS, VLAN ID, IP & MAC Addr, Broadcast, Multicast and Station Priority Link Budget ANTENNA BEAM WIDTH 24° azimuth, 12° elevation TRANSMIT POWER RANGE -20 to +30 dBm (combined, to regional EIRP limit) (1 dB interval) 294
CAMBIUM NETWORKS ANTENNA GAIN 12 dBi, integrated patch MAXIMUM TRANSMIT POWER 30 dBm combined Physical ANTENNA CONNECTION Integrated patch antenna SURGE SUPPRESSION 1 Joule Integrated ENVIRONMENTAL IP55 TEMPERATURE -30°C to +55°C (-22°F to +131°F) WEIGHT 0.49 kg (1.1 lb.) WIND SURVIVAL 145 km/hour (90 mi/hour) with antenna DIMENSIONS (H x W x D) 29.1 x 14.5 x 8.3 cm (11.4 x 5.7 x 3.3 in) POWER CONSUMPTION 7 W Maximum, 5 W Typical INPUT VOLTAGE 24 to 30 V Security ENCRYPTION 128-bit AES (CCMP mode) Certifications FCCID Z8H89FT0006 INDUSTRY CANADA CERT 109W-0006 CE EN 302 502 v1.2.1 EN 301 893 v1.7.1 295
CAMBIUM NETWORKS UN-SYNCED CONNECTORIZED RADIO SPECIFICATIONS Table 98 Un-synced Connectorized Radio specifications, 5 GHz Product SALES MODEL NUMBERS C058900A122A (US/FCC ), C050900A023A (EU), C050900A021A (ROW) Spectrum CHANNEL SPACING Configurable on 5 MHz increments FREQUENCY RANGE 5150 - 5875 MHz CHANNEL WIDTH 20 MHz or 40 MHz Interface MAC (MEDIA ACCESS CONTROL) LAYER Cambium Proprietary PHYSICAL LAYER 2x2 MIMO/OFDM ETHERNET INTERFACE 100BaseT, Cambium PoE (V+ = pins 7 & 8, Return = pins 4 & 5) PROTOCOLS USED IPv4, UDP, TCP, IP, ICMP, SSH, SNMPv2c, HTTPs, FTP NETWORK MANAGEMENT HTTPs, SSH, FTP, SNMPv2c VLAN 802.1Q with 802.1p priority Performance ARQ Yes NOMINAL RECEIVE SENSITIVITY (W/ FEC) @ 20MHZ CHANNEL MCS1 = -89 dBm to MCS15 = -70 dBm (per branch) NOMINAL RECEIVE SENSITIVITY (W/ FEC) @ 40MHZ CHANNEL MCS1 = -87 dBm to MCS15 = -65 dBm (per branch) MAXIMUM DEPLOYMENT RANGE @ 20 MHz CHANNEL Up to 13 miles MAXIMUM DEPLOYMENT RANGE @ 40 MHz CHANNEL Up to 9 miles MODULATION LEVELS (ADAPTIVE) MCS1 (QPSK 1/2) to MCS15 (64QAM 5/6) LATENCY (nominal, roundtrip) 17 ms QUALITY OF SERVICE Three level priority (Voice, High, Low) with packet classification by DSCP, COS, VLAN ID, IP & MAC Addr, Broadcast, Multicast and Station Priority 296
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Link Budget ANTENNA Options Antennas for 90° or 120° sectors are available TRANSMIT POWER RANGE -20 to +30 dBm (combined, to regional EIRP limit) (1 dB interval) ANTENNA GAIN 15 dBi (90° sector) MAXIMUM TRANSMIT POWER 30 dBm combined (5.8 GHz Band) Physical ANTENNA CONNECTION 50 Ω, RP (Rev SURGE SUPPRESSION 1 Joule Integrated ENVIRONMENTAL IP55 TEMPERATURE -30°C to +55°C (-22°F to +131°F) WEIGHT 4.5 kg (10 lbs) with antenna 0.52 kg (1.1 lbs) without antenna WIND SURVIVAL 190 km/hour (118 mi/hour) with antenna DIMENSIONS (H x W x D) Radio: 26.9 x 11 x 7.7 cm (10.6 x 4.3 x 3.0 in) Antenna (excl brackets): 80.4 x 16 x 6.3 cm (31.7 x 6.3 x 2.5 in) Security ENCRYPTION 128-bit AES (CCMP mode) Certifications FCCID Z8H89FT0006 INDUSTRY CANADA CERT 109W-0006 CE EN 302 502 v1.2.1 EN 301 893 v1.7.1 297
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Table 99 Un-synced Connectorized Radio specifications, 2.4 GHz Product SALES MODEL NUMBERS C024900A021A Spectrum CHANNEL SPACING Configurable on 5 MHz increments FREQUENCY RANGE 2402 - 2472 MHz (20 MHz) 2407 - 2472 MHz (40 MHz) CHANNEL WIDTH 20 MHz or 40 MHz Interface MAC (MEDIA ACCESS CONTROL) LAYER Cambium Proprietary PHYSICAL LAYER 2x2 MIMO/OFDM ETHERNET INTERFACE 100BaseT, Cambium PoE (V+ = pins 7 & 8, Return = pins 4 & 5) PROTOCOLS USED IPv4, UDP, TCP, IP, ICMP, SSH, SNMPv2c, HTTPs, FTP NETWORK MANAGEMENT HTTPs, SSH, FTP, SNMPv2c VLAN 802.1Q with 802.1p priority Performance ARQ Yes NOMINAL RECEIVE SENSITIVITY (W/ FEC) @ 20MHZ CHANNEL MCS1 = -89 dBm to MCS15 = -70 dBm (per branch) NOMINAL RECEIVE SENSITIVITY (W/ FEC) @ 40MHZ CHANNEL MCS1 = -87 dBm to MCS15 = -65 dBm (per branch) MAXIMUM DEPLOYMENT RANGE @ 20 MHz CHANNEL Up to 13 miles MAXIMUM DEPLOYMENT RANGE @ 40 MHz CHANNEL Up to 9 miles MODULATION LEVELS (ADAPTIVE) MCS1 (QPSK 1/2) to MCS15 (64QAM 5/6) LATENCY (nominal, roundtrip) 17 ms QUALITY OF SERVICE Three level priority (Voice, High, Low) with packet classification by DSCP, COS, VLAN ID, IP & MAC Addr, Broadcast, Multicast and Station Priority Link Budget ANTENNA Options Antennas for 90° or 120° sectors are available 298
CAMBIUM NETWORKS TRANSMIT POWER RANGE -20 to +30 dBm (combined, to regional EIRP limit) (1 dB interval) ANTENNA GAIN 15 dBi (90° / 120° sector) MAXIMUM TRANSMIT POWER 30 dBm combined Physical ANTENNA CONNECTION 50 Ω, RP (Reverse Pol female SURGE SUPPRESSION 1 Joule Integrated ENVIRONMENTAL IP55 TEMPERATURE -30°C to +55°C (-22°F to +131°F) WEIGHT 4.5 kg (10 lbs) with antenna 0.52 kg (1.1 lbs) without antenna WIND SURVIVAL 190 km/hour (118 mi/hour) with antenna DIMENSIONS (H x W x D) Radio: 26.9 x 11 x 7.7 cm (10.6 x 4.3 x 3.0 in) Antenna (excl brackets): 80.4 x 16 x 6.3 cm (31.7 x 6.3 x 2.5 in) Security ENCRYPTION 128-bit AES (CCMP mode) Certifications FCCID Z8H89FT0006 INDUSTRY CANADA CERT 109W-0006 CE EN 302 502 v1.2.1 EN 301 893 v1.7.1 299
CAMBIUM NETWORKS Glossary Term Definition AES Advanced Encryption Standard ANSI American National Standards Institute AP Access Point CINR Carrier to Interference plus Noise Ratio CMM Cluster Management Module CNSS Cambium Network Services Server DFS Dynamic Frequency Selection EIRP Equivalent Isotropically Radiated Power EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility EMD Electromagnetic Discharge ETH Ethernet ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute FCC Federal Communications Commission FEC Forward Error Correction GPS Global Positioning System GUI Graphical User Interface HTTP Hypertext Transfer Protocol IC Industry Canada IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IP Internet Protocol LAN Local Area Network LED Light Emitting Diode LOS Line of Sight MIMO Multiple In Multiple Out MTU Maximum Transmission Unit nLOS Near Line of Sight NTP Network Time Protocol OFDM Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing PC Personal Computer PMP Point to Multipoint QAM Quadrature Amplitude Modulation QPSK Quadrature Phase Shift Keyed RF Radio Frequency RMA Return Merchandise Authorization RSSI Received Signal Strength Indication RTTT Road Transport and Traffic Telematics RX Receive SAR Standard Absorption Rate SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol STA Station SW Software TDD Time Division Duplex 300
CAMBIUM NETWORKS TDWR Terminal Doppler Weather Radar TX Transmit UNII Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure URL Uniform Resource Locator VLAN Virtual Local Area Network 301

Navigation menu